JP7597895B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

Some conventional gaming machines are capable of displaying a specific display (a pending display or an active display) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the gaming ball entering the starting area) on the display means, and of executing a look-ahead prediction that suggests that a variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition will be controlled to an advantageous state even before the variable display begins. Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines are capable of executing a look-ahead prediction (specific light-emitting effect) by illuminating a light-emitting means provided in the gaming machine (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-105941 A

However, in Patent Document 1, depending on the timing when the display of the specific display starts and the timing when the specific light-emitting effect starts, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect. Furthermore, in Patent Document 1, if the light-emitting means continues to emit light as a specific light-emitting effect, the light emission may interfere with other effects, decreasing interest in the game.

The present invention was made with a focus on these problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows players to easily recognize the specific display that is the target of a specific light-emitting effect, while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
A display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
a performance execution means for executing a specific display performance for displaying the specific display and a specific light emission performance for causing the light emission means to emit light, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a special suggestion performance and a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance, a third suggestion performance, and a fourth suggestion performance each having a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion performance;
a development performance execution means capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is notified, and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved as a performance result of the second suggestion performance;
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the third suggestion performance having a higher expectation than the first suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed;
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed;
the effect execution means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect before the display of the specific display is completed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition;
The rate at which the specific light-emitting performance is controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting performance is executed than when the specific light-emitting performance is not executed,
The specific light-emitting performance is a performance in which, during a first period from when the specific light-emitting performance is started to a predetermined timing, the light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and during a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of a variable display that is a target of the specific light-emitting performance, the light-emitting means emits light in a specific manner that is less emphasized than the predetermined manner,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is executed and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is executed,
The specific timing is a timing prior to a timing at which a variable display result in the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is derived.
It is characterized by the following.
Furthermore, the gaming machine of the first means is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
a suggestion performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a special suggestion performance (for example, reach performance I) and a first suggestion performance (for example, reach performance A), a second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), a third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and a fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance E) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion performance;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach η, a portion where a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance is executed from the execution of a reach performance A), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after it is announced that the second suggestive performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state as a performance result (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ζ, a portion where a reach performance E development announcement performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is once announced as a performance result of a reach performance B);
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect A, and then the reach effect F is executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach effect B, and then the reach effect E development notification effect is executed, and the reach effect E is further executed).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance).
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state is shorter than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance F are set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result)).
moreover,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to a player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-28, Fig. 15-29(A) to Fig. 15-32(H), Fig. 15-49(A) to Fig. 15-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash effect to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash effect to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash effect, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash effect).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to an excessively long period until it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and in the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to preferably draw the player's attention to the special suggestion effect before it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving interest in the game. Furthermore, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and since the specific light emitting effect can be made more prominent by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period of the specific light emitting effect, it becomes even easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect.

In addition, the form for implementing the invention described below includes an invention relating to the following means A. As shown in JP 2016-105941 A, some conventional gaming machines are capable of displaying a specific display (a reserved display or an active display) based on the establishment of a specific condition (entry of the gaming ball into the starting area) on a display means based on the establishment of the specific condition, and of executing a look-ahead prediction that suggests that the variable display based on the establishment of the specific condition will be controlled to an advantageous state even before the variable display begins, as a target. Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines are capable of executing a look-ahead prediction (specific light-emitting effect) by illuminating a light-emitting means provided in the gaming machine.

However, depending on the timing when the display of the specific display starts and the timing when the specific light-emitting effect starts, it may become difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect.

This invention was made with an eye on these problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that makes it easier for players to recognize the specific display that is the target of a specific light-emitting effect.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to a player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-28, Fig. 15-29(A) to Fig. 15-32(H), Fig. 15-49(A) to Fig. 15-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash effect to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash effect to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash effect, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash effect).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light-emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the subject of the specific light-emitting effect, and during the first period of the specific light-emitting effect, not only the first light-emitting means but also the second light-emitting means are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, making the specific light-emitting effect stand out more, making it even easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the subject of the specific light-emitting effect.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. This is a timing chart showing the performance period for each variation pattern. This is a timing chart showing the performance period for each variation pattern. This is a timing chart showing the performance period for each variation pattern. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing details of the presentation when a high expectation reach presentation development notification presentation is executed, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a comparison between the early and late presentations. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading preview performance setting process. A diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading preview performance is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a meter effect determination process. 13A is a diagram showing whether or not a meter effect is executed and the decision ratio of the effect pattern, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram of each effect pattern. 11 is a timing chart showing the first to fifth timings in each fluctuation pattern. A flowchart showing an example of a reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a branch destination suggestion effect determination process. 13A is a diagram showing whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the decision ratio of the effect pattern, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process. (A) is a diagram showing the reach performance decision ratio when a jackpot is hit, (B) is a diagram showing the reach performance decision ratio when a miss is hit, (C) is a diagram showing a comparison between reach performance C and reach performance D, (D) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the decision ratio between reach performance C and reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when a jackpot is hit, and (E) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the decision ratio between reach performance C and reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when a miss is hit. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a chance-up effect determination process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the period during which chance-up effects can be executed during each reach effect. 13 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed as chance-up effects. FIG. (A) to (D) are figures showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed in each reach effect and the presentation pattern, and (E) and (F) are explanatory diagrams of the presentation patterns of the chance-up effects in each reach effect. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an image display device according to a modified example. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a change rate of the display mode of active display in a modified example. A figure showing whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the determination rate of the effect pattern in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. A figure showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the determination rate of the effect pattern in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of the length of the revival performance in a modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control data retention area. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an active display buffer. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. This figure shows whether or not a pending display preview is executed as a preview, and the decision ratio of the display pattern. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a specific display start performance execution process. A figure showing the presentation mode of specific display start presentation A. A figure showing the presentation mode of specific display start presentation B. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a flash effect execution process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a flash effect execution process when a prize is won. An explanatory diagram showing the presentation modes of the flash presentation when an early prize is won and the flash presentation when an late prize is won. A diagram showing the execution rate of flash effects when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. (A) is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp turned off. This is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at a low brightness (C2), and a front view of a pachinko gaming machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp when the game effect lamp is lit at a low brightness. This is a timing chart showing the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound when a start winning occurs that is the subject of the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp and the start port lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a start winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This is a timing chart showing the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound when a start winning occurs that is the subject of the winning flash effect in the modified example, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the start port lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of lighting of the winning flash lamp, game effect lamp and starting gate lamp, display of the effect image and silhouette image, and operation of the movable body in the modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of displaying the flash lamp and silhouette image when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of operation of the winning flash lamp and the movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing the determination ratio of the timing at which the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp changes. FIG. A diagram showing the display modes of the pending display and active display in the modified example, the suggested contents of each display mode, and the selection ratio when deciding to execute the slash performance when a winning combination is won. A figure showing the presentation patterns for pending display and active display when a flash presentation is executed when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation patterns for pending display and active display when a flash presentation is executed when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation patterns for pending display and active display when a flash presentation is executed when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 turning on and off, the movement of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball striking handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it diagnoses abnormalities in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special symbol processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, a determined special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In addition, the special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed in priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 8, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the second special display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability bonus state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 9. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 029SG in the Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, a characteristic feature 029SG according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The characteristic feature 029SG includes an invention 029SG and an invention 033SG.

The gaming machine of the first aspect of the invention 029SG is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
a suggestion performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a special suggestion performance (for example, reach performance I) and a first suggestion performance (for example, reach performance A), a second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), a third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and a fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance E) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion performance;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach η, a portion where a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance is executed from the execution of a reach performance A), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after it is announced that the second suggestive performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state as a performance result (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ζ, a portion where a reach performance E development announcement performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is once announced as a performance result of a reach performance B);
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect A, and then the reach effect F is executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach effect B, and then the reach effect E development notification effect is executed, and the reach effect E is further executed).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance).
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state is shorter than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance F are set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of a special development effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game caused by an excessively long period until it is announced that control will be entered into an advantageous state, and when the special suggestion effect is executed after the execution of a special development effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the special suggestion effect in an appropriate manner before it is announced that control will be entered into an advantageous state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The duration of the second suggestion effect is longer than the duration of the first suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the reach effect A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the second suggestion effect can attract the player's attention for a longer period of time than the first suggestion effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, unlike the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect does not execute a development effect before the effect result is notified, so that even if a special development effect is not executed, the player can be sure to pay attention to whether or not the effect result of the second suggestion effect indicates that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the third aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-29);
The development suggestion performance execution means includes:
As the development suggestion effect, a special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect can be executed during either the execution period of the first suggestion effect or the execution period of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in Figures 11-7 and 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, Super Reach ζ, and Super Reach η, a portion in which a meter effect can be executed during the execution of Reach effect A and the execution of Reach effect B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and during the execution period of the second suggestion effect, the special development suggestion effect can arouse the player's anticipation for the special development effect to be executed.

The gaming machine of the fourth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing the special development effect as a third development pattern before the special suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not executed and the special suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 and FIG. 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at a second timing without going through the execution of the reach effect A or the reach effect B, and a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is not executed, the special development effect is executed, and the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not a highly anticipated special suggestion effect will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when the special suggestion effect is executed and it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled is longer than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when the third suggestion effect is executed and it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of reach effect I (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of reach effect F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by lengthening the period until notification when a highly anticipated special development effect is executed, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation of being controlled into an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the sixth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-29);
The development suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a special development suggestion performance (e.g., a meter performance) in which a performance mode changes stepwise to suggest the execution of the special development performance, and a special development suggestion performance (e.g., a reach performance development suggestion performance) in which a performance mode changes stepwise to suggest the execution of the special development performance,
The rate at which the presentation mode changes to a specific number in the special development suggestion performance is higher than the rate at which the presentation mode changes to the specific number in the special development suggestion performance (for example, as shown in Figures 11-24 and 11-54, the meter performance changes the display mode of the meter 029SG005M in five stages (six stages if the state in which the meter performance is not executed is included), whereas the reach performance E development suggestion performance changes the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image in two stages).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first suggestion effect in which a special development suggestion effect is executed and the second suggestion effect in which a special development suggestion effect is executed, and since the special development suggestion effect is more likely to change to a specific stage number than the special development suggestion effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it will change to a specific stage number, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A seventh aspect of the gaming machine of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect,
The period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed is longer than the period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 to FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach δ or the super reach ζ, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to suggest that the third suggestion performance, which has a higher expectation than the first suggestion performance, will be executed after the special development performance is executed for a longer period of time than the fourth suggestion performance will be executed after the execution of the special development performance is suggested, thereby increasing the interest in the special development suggestion performance.

The gaming machine of the eighth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh aspect,
When the second suggestion effect is executed, the development suggestion effect execution means does not execute the special development suggestion effect until the effect result of the second suggestion effect is notified (for example, the reach effect E development suggestion effect is a part that can be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game from occurring due to the player perceiving that a special development suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestion effect, thereby informing the player that the result of the second suggestion effect is that the player will not be controlled to an advantageous state.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects,
a favorable result suggestion effect (e.g., chance-up effect) that suggests that the result of the suggestion effect will be favorable to the player while the suggestion effect is being executed, the favorable result suggestion effect being executed based on the number of executions of constituent effects that make up the favorable result suggestion effect (e.g., a portion that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31);
The number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34, during the execution of reach effect F, a total of three effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern S, pattern T, or pattern U), whereas during the execution of reach effect A, a total of two effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern P or pattern Q)).
The number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the fourth suggestion effect is being executed is equal to or less than the number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the second suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34, during the execution of reach effect E, a total of two effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern S and pattern Q), whereas during the execution of reach effect B, a total of three effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the case where a special development effect is executed and then a third suggestive effect is executed before the result of the first suggestive effect is announced, the number of times the constituent effects are executed is greater when the third suggestive effect is executed than when the first suggestive effect is executed, thereby making it possible to preferably draw the player's attention to the result of the third suggestive effect; and in the case where a special development effect is executed and then a fourth suggestive effect is executed after it is announced that the second suggestive effect will not be controlled to an advantageous state as a result, the number of times the constituent effects are executed when the fourth suggestive effect is executed is less than the number of times the constituent effects are executed when the second suggestive effect is executed, thereby preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the result of the fourth suggestive effect, thereby improving interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the ninth aspect,
The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the advantageous result suggestion effect (e.g., chance up effect) in a plurality of modes including a common mode,
Even if the advantageous result suggestion effect of the common aspect is executed, the expectation degree differs depending on the type of the suggestion effect in which the advantageous result suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-12, the expectation degree of a jackpot differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of advantageous result suggestion display patterns, while drawing the player's attention to which suggestion display is being executed during which of the common patterns of advantageous result suggestion displays, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 029SG in aspect 11 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9 or 10,
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of displaying an expectation level corresponding image corresponding to the expectation level of the suggestive performance when executing the suggestive performance, and is also capable of changing the expectation level corresponding image to a different expectation level corresponding image when the advantageous result suggestive performance is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-5, when the characters of a reach title image are changed to red halfway through as a chance-up performance, a display mode of an expectation level image showing the expectation level of a jackpot displayed together with the reach title image is changed (the number of stars displayed as the expectation level image is increased)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the image corresponding to the expectation level changes as the advantageous result suggestive effect is executed, so that it is possible to increase attention to the image corresponding to the expectation level, thereby enabling the player to accurately recognize the expectation level of the suggestive effect.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
a specific image suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a specific image suggestion effect (for example, an active display effect shown in modified example 029SG-1) which is an effect different from the suggestion effect and suggests that the advantageous state will be controlled by the display mode of a specific image (for example, an active display) displayed during the suggestion effect (for example, a part which displays an active display in one of a plurality of display modes in an active display area 029SG005F provided in a display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-57 as modified example 029SG-1, and varies the probability of winning depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in);
The specific image suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a common specific image suggestion effect in common to all of the different types of suggestion effects as the specific image suggestion effect (for example, a portion in which an active display can be displayed in a white circle, a blue circle, or a red circle);
In the first development pattern, the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect executed before the special development effect is lower than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as modified example 029SG-1, in the variable display of the variable display of the super reach η in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed and a reach effect F is further executed before a variable display result is notified as a result of the reach effect A, the rate P2 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect A is lower than the rate P3 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F).
The rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the first development pattern is higher than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the fourth suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as modified example 029SG-1, the rate P3 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach effect F in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η is higher than the rate P1 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach effect E in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which a variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of the reach effect B, a reach effect E development notification effect is executed, and then the reach effect E is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect is executed and then the third suggestion effect is executed, the specific image suggestion effect is executed before the start of the special development effect, thereby reducing the risk that the player will be aware in advance that the third suggestion effect will be executed, and since the common specific image suggestion effect is executed appropriately between the third suggestion effect and the fourth suggestion effect according to the degree of expectation, interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the twelfth aspect,
The specific image suggestion performance execution means is capable of changing the display mode of the specific image from a first mode (e.g., a white circle or a blue circle) to any one of a plurality of modes including a second mode (e.g., a red circle) having a higher expectation than the first mode;
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development performance is lower than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the development performance is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-2, in a variable display in a fluctuation pattern of a super reach η, a rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance F is set higher than a rate P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance A, and in a variable display in a fluctuation pattern of a super reach ζ, a rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance E is set higher than a rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance B).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state by the display mode of the specific image, and reduces the risk of a decrease in interest in the game due to the player perceiving that the degree of expectation is high in advance because the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development performance.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the twelfth or thirteenth aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing the special development effect as a third development pattern before the special suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not executed and the special suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, a part in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from a timing before the reach when the reach effect A and the reach effect B are not executed).
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestion performance in the third development pattern is higher than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the special suggestion performance in the third development pattern is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach λ, the rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach performance I is set higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach performance I).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestion effect is performed, making it easier for the player to recognize that the special suggestion effect will be executed.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the twelfth to fourteenth aspects,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A reserved memory means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 11-14 );
A determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11-17) capable of determining that the development performance is executed when the variable display is started;
A determination means capable of determining that the development performance will be executed before the determination by the determination means with respect to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory (for example, in the random number value determination process at the time of winning in variant example 029SG-4, when the CPU 103 determines that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation category) is a Super Reach, the determination means further determines which of the Super Reach fluctuation patterns from Super Reach α to Super Reach λ it is (a part which determines which of Reach performance A to Reach performance I will be executed during the variable display);
Equipped with
The specific image suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing, as the specific image suggestion effect, an effect suggesting that the special development effect will be executed and an effect suggesting that the special development effect will be executed based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, in variant example 029SG-4, in addition to a circle, a triangle, a square, a star, etc. are provided as the display form of the pending memory table display, and a part that can suggest which of reach effects E, F, G, H, and I the pending memory display will develop into depending on which shape is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image suggestion presentation before the variable display starts, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of the first aspect of the invention 033SG is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, reach effect C), a second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect D), and a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect G) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, a portion where a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance is executed and it is notified that the performance result will not be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, a portion where a reach performance G development notification performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ);
In the first development pattern, a predetermined performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a premonition performance shown in FIG. 11-9) before the special development performance is executed;
Equipped with
The first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect have different expectations (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30(C), the reach effect D has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach effect C),
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach effect I is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and then the reach effect G development notification effect is executed, and the reach effect G is further executed).
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, a specific suggestion effect different from the special suggestion effect and the special suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed, and then a reach effect H is executed).
When controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the special development effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the variable display result is a jackpot, that is, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, the determination rate of the super reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the variable display is higher than the determination rate of the super reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) in which a reach effect G development notification effect is executed during the variable display).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is set longer than the length L8 of the execution period of the reach performance G development notification performance),
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The rate at which the special development effect is executed after the execution of the predetermined effect in the first suggestion effect is different from the rate at which the special development effect is executed after the execution of the predetermined effect in the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in Figures 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (C), the rate at which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after a premonition effect when a reach effect C is executed is higher than the rate at which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after a premonition effect when a reach effect D is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation can be diversified by combining the types of suggestive presentation and the types of developing presentation, and a predetermined relationship can be given to the suggestive presentation and the developing presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the suggestive presentation and the developing presentation.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
A development pre-effect execution means is provided that can execute a development pre-effect before the special development effect or the specific development effect is executed (for example, a portion in which a pre-effect is executed from a timing prior to the reach effect H development notification effect in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, and a portion in which a pre-effect is executed from a timing prior to the high expectation reach effect development notification effect in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ),
The development pre-effect execution means is capable of executing the development pre-effect common to the case where the special development effect is executed and the case where the specific development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-51, a part in which a pre-effect of a common mode is executed between the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pre-development performance is executed to increase attention to the development performance, while also drawing the player's attention to whether the development performance to be executed is a special development performance or a specific development performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the third aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
a development suggestion performance execution means (for example, a part that executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10 after the performance control CPU 120 determines to execute the branch destination suggestion performance in the branch destination performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-27 ) capable of executing a special development suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern Z displaying a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z on the image display device 5) that suggests the execution of the special development performance, a specific development suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern Y displaying a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y on the image display device 5) that suggests the execution of the specific development performance, and a common development suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern X displaying a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X on the image display device 5);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether a special development suggestion effect, a specific development suggestion effect, or a common development suggestion effect will be executed as the development suggestion effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the fourth aspect of the invention 033SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The second difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern, is smaller than the first difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the first development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive performance is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in 11-30(D), in the case of a super reach κ in which a high expectation reach performance development notification performance and a reach performance I are executed before the performance result is announced as a reach performance C or a reach performance D, Regarding the variation pattern and the variation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed after the performance result is notified as the reach performance C or the reach performance D, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ is 60%, whereas the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ is 40%)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, depending on whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, it becomes possible to guess whether it is the first development pattern in which a special development effect is executed, or the second development pattern in which a special development effect is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to draw attention to whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect,
The rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern are the same or approximately the same (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, the execution decision rate of reach performance C and the execution decision rate of reach performance D are the same).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to expect that the second development pattern will result in the special development effect being executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the sixth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth or fifth aspect,
The expectation level when the first suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern is the same or substantially the same as the expectation level when the second suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, the jackpot expectation level when the execution of reach performance C is determined and the jackpot expectation level when the execution of reach performance D is determined are the same).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, when the special development effect is executed, it is possible to similarly expect that an advantageous state will be achieved, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the seventh aspect of the invention 033SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
a favorable result suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31) capable of executing a first favorable result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the first suggestion effect will be favorable to the player while the first suggestion effect is being executed, and a second favorable result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the second suggestion effect will be favorable to the player while the second suggestion effect is being executed;
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-29);
Equipped with
The rate at which the development suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern is different from the rate at which the development suggestion effect is executed when the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-6, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach κ, a portion that can determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect at different rates when the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C and when it is reach effect D).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution rate of the development suggestion effect, which suggests the execution of a special development effect, differs between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, so that the suggestion that the development suggestion effect will be executed can be appropriately given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the eighth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh aspects,
a favorable result suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31) capable of executing a first favorable result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the first suggestion effect will be favorable to the player while the first suggestion effect is being executed, and a second favorable result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the second suggestion effect will be favorable to the player while the second suggestion effect is being executed;
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-29);
Equipped with
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect when the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern is different from the rate at which the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestion effect when the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as modified example 029SG-13, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of a super reach κ in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect and a reach effect I are executed before a variable display result (miss) is notified as a result of the effect of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, a part capable of determining whether or not to execute a chance-up effect at different rates between when the execution of the reach effect C is determined and when the execution of the reach effect D is determined).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution rate of the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect, which suggest that the result of the presentation will be advantageous, differs between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, so that the suggestion of the presentation result can be made in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
The degree of relationship between the suggestion by the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect is that the specific development effect or the special development effect is executed after the execution of the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect, and the degree of relationship between the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect is higher than the relationship between the result of the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(A), the presence or absence of the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern differ in the determination ratio according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and the determination ratio does not differ according to the variable display result. In other words, the presence or absence of the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern are determined according to whether or not the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed and whether it develops into any of the reach effects G to I, and which of these reach effects G to I it develops into).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the suggestions given by the first special development effect and the second special development effect are closely related to the execution of a specific development effect or a special development effect close to the time of execution of the first special development effect or the second special development effect, so that the execution of the first special development effect and the second special development effect can increase attention to the specific development effect or the special development effect, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 033SG according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to ninth aspects,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect when the special development effect is not executed after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the execution of a premonition effect).
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed differs before and after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, as shown in variant example 029SG-12, the portion in which the probability of winning differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by being able to preferably execute the first advantageous outcome suggestion display or the second advantageous outcome suggestion display, it is possible to increase attention as to whether the first or second development pattern will occur.

The gaming machine of the invention 033SG in aspect 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7 to 10,
The notification modes of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance include a first notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is simply notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, in the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and the variable display ends), and a second notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is notified once, and then the fact that the performance will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-7, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) in which the variable display result is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance A to the reach performance D, and then the variable display result is once notified as a jackpot).
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed when the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed when the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-7, the rate at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z when the result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z when the result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are notified in the second notification mode, thereby giving the player a sense of surprise, and the process of deciding to execute the first advantageous outcome suggestive effect or the second advantageous outcome suggestive effect can be standardized between the case where the result of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is notified in the first notification mode and the case where the result of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is notified in the second notification mode, thereby reducing the amount of data required for the process.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect of the invention 033SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to eleventh aspects,
The notification modes of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance include a first notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is simply notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, in the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and the variable display ends), and a second notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is notified once, and then the fact that the performance will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-7, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) in which the variable display result is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance A to the reach performance D, and then the variable display result is once notified as a jackpot).
When the special development effect is executed after the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed in the case where it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled in the suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is different from the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed in the case where the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-8, reach effect C or reach effect D is executed, and this In the case where the variable display result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is notified that the variable display result is a miss, the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, and it is notified that the variable display result of the reach performance G is a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ jackpot), the percentage at which the chance up performance is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is different from the percentage at which the chance up performance is executed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed can be varied depending on whether or not a special development effect is executed before it is announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 033SG in aspect 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7 to 12,
The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of advantageous result suggestion effects (e.g., branch destination suggestion effects of pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z) including the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect,
The execution rate of the special development effect differs depending on which of the advantageous result suggestion effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the execution rate of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect differs depending on whether the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern X, pattern Y, or pattern Z).
During the execution of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect, if the special development effect is not executed when the special advantageous result suggestion effect or the special suggestion effect with the highest execution rate of the special development effect is executed, the result of the effect notifying that the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect being executed will be controlled to the advantageous state will be (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-9, in the case where the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern Z but the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed, or in the case where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed but the reach effect I is executed, the part that notifies that the variable display result will be a jackpot).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can give the player a sense of surprise and can also make the player pay attention to whether or not a special development effect will be executed when a special advantageous result suggestion effect or a special suggestion effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 11-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 029SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 11-1 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-1(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a design specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not and the type of jackpot (probable win or non-probable win) as the judgment result at the time of winning. In addition, command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the fluctuation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern.

The commands shown in FIG. 11-1(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 11-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 11-2, in this feature section 029SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 11-3 shows an example of the configuration of a special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 029SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 029SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 029SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 029SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 029SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 11-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 029SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 029SG will be explained using FIG. 11-4 (B). In this feature section 029SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of a jackpot game state of a special jackpot A to a special jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the special jackpots A to C, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 029SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 11-5 shows the variation patterns in this feature part 029SG. In this feature part 029SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that, although this feature section 029SG has one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this feature section 029SG, eleven types of fluctuation patterns are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns: Super reach α, Super reach β, Super reach γ, Super reach δ, Super reach ε, Super reach ζ, Super reach η, Super reach θ, Super reach ι, Super reach κ, and Super reach λ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 12 or more types of super reach fluctuation patterns or only 10 or less types may be provided.

The Super Reach fluctuation patterns in this feature part 029SG are: Super Reach α fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2) and a miss (PA2-2); Super Reach β fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-3) and a miss (PA2-3); Super Reach γ fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-4) and a miss (PA2-4); Super Reach δ fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a miss (PA2-5); Super Reach ε fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a miss (PA2-6); and Super Reach ζ fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-5). There are provided a variation pattern (PA2-7) that results in a miss, a variation pattern (PB1-6) for the variable display result of the super reach η and a variation pattern (PA2-8) that results in a miss, a variation pattern (PB1-7) for the variable display result of the super reach θ and a variation pattern (PA2-9) that results in a miss, a variation pattern (PB1-8) for the variable display result of the super reach ι and a variation pattern (PA2-10) that results in a miss, a variation pattern (PB1-9) for the variable display result of the super reach κ and a variation pattern (PA2-11) that results in a miss, and a variation pattern (PB1-10) for the variable display result of the super reach λ and a variation pattern (PA2-12) that results in a miss.

As shown in Figure 11-5, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 029SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing. Therefore, with some exceptions, in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In particular, the special chart change time of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, the special chart change time of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern, the special chart change time of the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern, the special chart change time of the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern, and the special chart change time of the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super The special chart change time is set longer than the special chart change time of the reach ε change pattern, the special chart change time of the super reach η change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach ζ change pattern, the special chart change time of the super reach θ change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach η change pattern, the special chart change time of the super reach ι change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach θ change pattern, and the special chart change time of the super reach κ change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach ι change pattern.

In addition, among these Super Reach α fluctuation pattern to Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, there are no fluctuation patterns for the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot. In other words, among these Super Reach α fluctuation pattern to Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, excluding the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern, the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern is set to have the shortest special chart fluctuation time and the lowest jackpot expectation, and is set so that the longer the special chart fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

Furthermore, in this feature part 029SG, a Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is provided as a Super Reach fluctuation pattern with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. The Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is exceptionally set to have a special chart fluctuation time longer than the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern and shorter than the Super Reach η fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (A), the super reach α variation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2) is a variation pattern in which reach performance A with an execution period length of L1 is executed as a reach performance of a super reach during variable display, and the variable display result is announced as the performance result of the reach performance A. As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (B), the super reach β variation pattern (PA2-3, PB1-3) is a variation pattern in which reach performance B with an execution period length of L2 (L2>L1) is executed as a reach performance of a super reach during variable display, and the variable display result is announced as the performance result of the reach performance B.

As shown in Figures 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B), the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern are also fluctuation patterns that can execute a meter effect that suggests the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect from the variable display start timing to the reach effect end timing (variable display result notification timing). As mentioned above, the length L2 of the execution period of reach effect B is set to be longer than the length L1 of the execution period of reach effect A, so the length L5 of the meter effect execution period in the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is set to be longer than the length L4 of the meter effect execution period in the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern (L5>L4).

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-7 (C), the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4, PB1-4) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or reach performance D. The execution period of both reach performance C and reach performance D is set to length L3. In addition, the super reach γ variation pattern is also a variation pattern capable of executing a branch destination suggestion performance that suggests which of the following will be executed (which notification performance to branch to) during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D: a reach performance H development notification performance that notifies that a reach performance H will be executed after the variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, and a high expectation reach performance development notification performance that notifies that either reach performance F or reach performance I will be executed.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-7 (D), the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5) is a variation pattern in which a reach performance B with an execution period length of L2 is executed as a reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and then a reach performance E development suggestive performance suggesting development to a reach performance E can be executed (length of the reach performance E development suggestive performance executable period: L6a), and finally, it is a variation pattern that does not develop to a reach performance E and notifies of a miss. Note that the super reach δ variation pattern, like the super reach β variation pattern, is also a variation pattern in which a meter performance can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach performance (length of the meter performance executable period: L5), and the length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestive performance executable period.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (E), the super reach ε variation pattern (PA2-6) is a variation pattern in which, during the variable display, reach performance C or reach performance D (the execution period of either reach performance is L3) is executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified that it is a miss, and then a reach performance G development suggestion performance is executed, which suggests development to reach performance G, and finally notifies of a miss without developing to reach performance G. The super reach ε variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-8 (F), the super reach ζ variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-5) is a variation pattern in which a reach performance B with an execution period length of L2 is executed as a reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and a reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed after notifying that the variable display result is a miss, and then a reach performance E development notification performance (length of execution period of reach performance E development notification performance: L6b) that notifies that it will develop into a reach performance E is executed, and then a reach performance E is executed. The super reach ζ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a meter performance can be executed (length of meter performance executable period: L5) from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach performance B. The length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period. The length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance is set shorter than the length L5 of the meter performance executable period. In addition, the Super Reach ζ variation pattern has a period length from the start of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end of the reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result) set to L11.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (G), the super reach η variation pattern (PA2-8, PB1-6) is a variation pattern in which reach performance A is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and a high expectation reach performance development notification performance that notifies the player that the reach performance A will develop into a reach performance with a high expectation of a jackpot (reach performance F or reach performance I described later in this characteristic part) is executed for L7 (L7>L6b), which is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance, and then a reach performance F is executed. The super reach η variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a meter performance can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the timing when the reach performance A switches to the high expectation reach performance development notification performance (the length of the meter performance execution period is L4', which is shorter than L4, because the reach performance A switches to the high expectation reach performance development notification performance halfway through). In addition, in the super reach η fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L12 (L12>L11), which is longer than the length of the period L11 from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-8 (H), the super reach θ variation pattern (PA2-9, PB1-7) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D (the execution period of either reach performance is L3) is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and after notifying that the variable display result is a miss in these reach performances C or reach performance D, a reach performance G development suggestion performance can be executed, and further, a reach performance G development notification performance that notifies that it will develop into reach performance G is executed for L8 (L7>L8), which is shorter than the execution period L7 of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and further the reach performance G is executed. The super reach θ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-9 (I), the super reach ι variation pattern (PA2-10, PB1-8) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during variable display, and a pre-performance and a precursor performance are executed in place of reach performance C or reach performance D halfway through reach performance C or reach performance D, and then a reach performance H development notification performance is executed to notify that the performance will develop into reach performance H, thereby executing the reach performance H. The super reach ι variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-9 (J), the super reach κ variation pattern (PA2-11, PB1-9) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during variable display, and a pre-performance and a precursor performance are executed in place of reach performance C or reach performance D halfway through reach performance C or reach performance D, and further a high expectation reach performance development notification performance with an execution period length of L7 is executed to execute reach performance I. The super reach κ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D. In addition, in the super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11), which is longer than the length of the period L12 from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance F in the super reach η fluctuation pattern.

The Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern (PA2-12, PB1-10) is a fluctuation pattern that executes a high expectation reach performance development notification performance with a duration of L7 from a timing before the reach in other Super Reach fluctuation patterns during variable display, and executes the reach performance I. The Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern that can execute a meter performance from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance (since the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed from a timing before the reach, the duration of the meter performance execution period is L4'' which is even shorter than L4': L4>L4'>L4''). In addition, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) of the Super Reach κ is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11), the same as the Super Reach κ.

In particular, as shown in Figures 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B), the high expectation reach performance development notification performance in this feature section 029SG includes a blackout performance in which the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make it difficult to see the performance image displayed on the image display device 5, an early performance in which the opening lines are displayed on the image display device 5 after the blackout performance, a switching performance after the early performance, a late performance in which the closing lines are displayed on the image display device 5 after the switching performance, and a movable body performance in which the movable body 32 is dropped (operated) from an origin position above the image display device 5 to a performance position overlapping with approximately the center of the front of the display area of the image display device 5 after the late performance.

As shown in Figures 11-10(B) and 11-55, the first stage performance is a performance in which the lines spoken by the character displayed on the image display device 5 are displayed as a text image 029SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5 and are also output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figures 11-10(B) and 11-55, the latter stage performance follows the former stage performance and displays the lines spoken by the character as a text image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, and also outputs them as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the opening line is "You're not alone...we'll show you everyone's power!", and the closing line is "Miracle attack!".

More specifically, the first stage performance is composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the phrase "You're not alone..." is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the seven letters of "You're not alone..." are displayed in the display area of image display device 5. Then, in the second period, the phrase "I'll show you everyone's power!" is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the 12 letters of "I'll show you everyone's power!" are displayed below the letters "You're not alone..." in the display area of image display device 5. The second stage performance is also composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the phrase "Miracle" is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the four letters of "Miracle" are displayed in the display area of image display device 5. During the second period, the line "Attack!" is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the five letters of "Attack!" are displayed below the word "Miracle" in the display area of the image display device 5.

In other words, in the front and back performances of this feature part 029SG, the number of characters displayed in the first period of the front performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first period of the back performance, and the number of characters displayed in the second period of the front performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second period of the back performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the display manner of the lines in the early performance differs from the display manner of the lines in the late performance, and in particular, the lines in the late performance are displayed in a manner that is more emphasized than the display manner of the lines in the early performance.

For example, in the first stage performance, the background screen and character image of the image display device 5 are displayed in a dark manner, and a text image 029SG007 consisting of multiple characters (e.g., "You're not alone...") is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger and brighter (fade-in) during the first period, and then a text image 029SG007 consisting of multiple characters (e.g., "I'll show you all our power!") is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger and brighter (fade-in) during the second period. Also, after the text image 029SG007 (e.g., "You're not alone...I'll show you all our power!") is displayed at its largest and brightest, it is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes smaller and darker (fade-out) and finally disappears. Note that the text image 029SG007 may move while fading in or out.

Meanwhile, in the latter stage performance, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter manner than in the former stage performance, and multiple character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "Mi", "Ra", "Ku", "Ru") are displayed (dynamically displayed) in a manner that rotates and moves from the right side of the display screen toward the center in sequence during the first period (frame-in), and multiple character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "A", "Ta", "T", "Ku", "!") are displayed (dynamically displayed) in a manner that rotates and moves from the bottom side of the display screen toward the center during the second period (frame-in). Also, after these character images 029SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") are displayed largest and brightest, they move radially outward and are finally displayed in a manner that disappears outside the display screen (frame-out).

As shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the character image 029SG007 in the first stage performance is small, flat (two-dimensional), moves slowly (the speed at which the display mode changes due to fading in) and is displayed at a low brightness. On the other hand, the character image 029SG008 in the second stage performance is larger, three-dimensional (three-dimensional), moves faster (the speed at which the display mode changes due to framing in (movement speed)) and is displayed at a high brightness than the character image 029SG007 in the first stage performance (see Figure 11-55).

In addition, as long as the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG008 in the latter performance is larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG007 in the former performance, the size and brightness of a portion of the character image when fading in or framing in may be inversely related. Also, although the content of the dialogue differs between the former and latter performances, at least some of the content may be the same.

In this way, it can be said that the larger the size of the character images that make up the dialogue, the higher the degree of emphasis; the more three-dimensional the form is than the more two-dimensional, the faster the movement is than the slower the movement, and the higher the brightness is than the lower the degree of emphasis. In the above, the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character images are exemplified in the latter stage performance as being more emphasized than in the former stage performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the degree of emphasis of at least one element of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character images in the latter stage performance is higher than that of the character images in the former stage performance. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis may include a higher degree of emphasis for thicker characters than for thin characters, and a higher degree of saturation or brightness than for low colors. Furthermore, the degree of emphasis may be increased not only by the display mode of the character images themselves, but also by displaying special images such as effect images around the character images.

Figure 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature part 029SG. In this feature part 029SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-5 (super reach ζ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-6 (super reach η jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-7 (super reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-8 (super reach ι jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-9 (super reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-10 (super reach λ jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table.

When using the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table to determine the fluctuation pattern, the determination ratio of PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot) is set to the lowest, followed by PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot), PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-6 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-8 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-9 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-10 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-11 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-12 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-13 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-14 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-15 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-16 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-17 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-18 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-19 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-20 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-21 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-22 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-23 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-24 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-25 (fluctuation pattern The determination rate can be set to increase in the following order: PB1-1 (Pear Reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-8 (Super Reach ι jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-9 (Super Reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-10 (Super Reach λ jackpot fluctuation pattern) (Determination rate of each Super Reach fluctuation pattern when selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table: PB1-2<PB1-3<PB1-4<PB1-5<PB1-6<PB1-7<PB1-8<PB1-9<PB1-10).

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for any of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3, and to provide multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for at least two or more jackpot variation patterns, and to determine the variation pattern using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables depending on the type of jackpot. In this way, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot, so that the player can pay attention to which variable display pattern has resulted in the variable display result being a jackpot, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A as PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern), It is determined from the following: PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B as PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ miss), It is determined from the following: PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C as PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ miss) It is determined from the following: PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D as PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern), It is determined from PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature part 029SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

When determining the fluctuation pattern using miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D, the determination ratio of non-reach miss fluctuation patterns (PA1-1 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-2 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-3 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, and PA1-4 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table D) is set highest, followed by PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-5 (super reach δ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-6 (super reach 7 miss fluctuation pattern), and (Super reach ε miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-7 (Super reach ζ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-8 (Super reach η miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-9 (Super reach θ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-10 (Super reach ι miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-11 (Super reach κ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-12 (Super reach λ miss fluctuation pattern) should be set to decrease in order (Decision ratio of each super reach fluctuation pattern when the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table is selected: PA2-12<PA2-11<PA2-10<PA2-9<PA2-8<PA2-7<PA2-6<PA2-5<PA2-4<PA2-3<PA2-2).

By setting the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern in each fluctuation pattern judgment table as described above, for the Super Reach fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern is set to the lowest, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach The jackpot expectation of the Super Reach η fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach η fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. As for the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern, as mentioned above, only the fluctuation patterns in the case where the variable display result is a miss are provided, so the jackpot expectation is 0.

Next, the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 029SG will be described. In the display area of the image display device 5, the effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are arranged. In addition, a first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 029SG005U are set in two places on the left and right of the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 029SG005U, a reserved memory display that identifiably displays the reserved memory number (special reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special game is displayed. In this characteristic part 029SG, these reserved displays can be displayed in multiple display modes, and a pre-reading notice display (also called a reserved display notice display) that changes the rate at which the reserved memory display is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display (the probability of a jackpot) can be executed.

Furthermore, on the right side of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 029SG, a meter 029SG005M is displayed, the display state of which can be changed in five stages (six stages if the state in which the meter performance is not executed is included) as the meter performance described above.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 029SG is provided with a game control data holding area 029SG150 as shown in FIG. 11-12, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 029SG150 shown in FIG. 11-12 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 029SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 029SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 029SG151C, a game control flag setting section 029SG152, a game control timer setting section 029SG153, a game control counter setting section 029SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 029SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 029SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 029SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 029SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 029SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 029SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 029SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 3 is provided with a performance control data holding area 029SG190 as shown in Figure 11-13(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 029SG190 shown in Figure 11-13(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 029SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 029SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 029SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 029SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 029SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 029SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 029SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 029SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 029SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 029SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 029SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 029SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 029SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 029SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command separately in the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A of this characteristic part 029SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that the hold display flag, which is set to a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the start winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold memory display, depending on whether or not the display pattern associated with the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the pre-reading preview setting process (Fig. 11-20) is undetermined due to the occurrence of a new start winning, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart hold memory and the second special chart hold memory.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, the hold display flag is set to "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold memory display, and the hold memory display in the normal display mode (e.g., a white circle) is displayed in the first hold memory display area 029SG5D and the second hold memory display area 029SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5. When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is determined, the hold display flag is set to "1" (blue circle) or "2" (red circle) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (e.g., a blue circle or a red circle) different from the normal display mode, and the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold memory display area 029SG5D and the second hold memory display area 029SG5U, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is set to notify the possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory or the second special symbol reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 029SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 11-13(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 029SG executed in step S101 of Fig. 6 will be described based on Fig. 11-14. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the ON state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 029SGS101a). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the ON state (step 029SGS101a; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 029SGS102). The CPU 103 can specify the first reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "1" (step 029SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 029SGS101a (step 029SGS101a; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step 029SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 029SGS101b; Y), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 029SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS105 (step 029SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "2" (step 029SGS106).

After executing either step 029SGS103 or step 029SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 029SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 029SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 029SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 (step 029SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 029SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 029SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 029SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 029SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of step 029SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 029SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 029SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the process of step 029SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS115), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 029SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS116), and the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 11-15 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 029SGS112 in Figure 11-14 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 029SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a determination is made by the normal special symbol process (step S22 in Figure 6, Figure 11-16) described below as to whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" and to control the game to a jackpot. Also, in the variable pattern setting process (step S23 in Figure 6, Figure 11-17) described below, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 029SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 or the like executes a notice performance such as a pre-reading notice performance, as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 11-15(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 (step 029SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 029SGS121, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set (step 029SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 029SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 029SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 029SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the winning combination is not within the winning combination range, that is, if it is determined that the winning combination is not a winning combination in the variable display (step 029SGS123; N), that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is a "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "miss" (step 029SGS128), is executed, and it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 029SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 029SGS129; N), the losing combination pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 029SGS129; Y), the losing combination pattern determination table D is selected and set (step 029SGS131). In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table A is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved memories is two or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

Also, if it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 029SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-15(A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 029SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

In addition, the sending setting of the symbol designation command according to the type of jackpot determined is executed (step 029SGS133), i.e., the second symbol designation command in case of a sure jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in case of a sure jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command in case of a sure jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command in case of a non-variable jackpot, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 029SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS130, step 029SGS131, and step 029SGS135, the variable category according to the range of judgment values that includes the random number value MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern judgment tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variable pattern judgment (step 029SGS138). In this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-15(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the determination made by the processing of step 029SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 029SGS139), and the winning random number determination process is terminated.

Figure 11-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 6 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 11-16, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 029SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 029SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be read, and it may be judged whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 029SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 029SGS143).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 029SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 029SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 029SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 029SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 029SGS141 that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0", and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

In addition, the special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 029SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 029SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 029SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

In step 029SGS149, the special pattern display result judgment table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 029SGS150a). In addition, in this step 029SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability of a jackpot is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the result of the special chart display falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss."

In this way, in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected in step 029SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 029SGS150a, whether or not to set the special chart display result as a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) as a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON in the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 (step 029SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 029SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 029SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 029SGS154, it is determined whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state, before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as a variable display result. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the jackpot type determined is stored by setting, for example, a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 (step 029SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it can be set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it can be set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it can be set to "3".

After step 029SGS155 is completed, or if it is determined in step 029SGS150a that the game is not a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; N), a fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the on state) and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if it is determined in step 029SGS150a that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," if the jackpot type in step 029SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot," a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C," a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are merely examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 029SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 029SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 029SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 11-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 6 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is set to the ON state (step 029SGS161). If the jackpot flag is set to the ON state (step 029SGS161; Y), the CPU 103 selects and sets the fluctuation pattern determination table for the jackpot (step 029SGS164).

If the judgment in step 029SGS161 does not indicate that the jackpot flag is on (step 029SGS161; N), the game control flag setting unit judges whether the time-saving flag is on to judge whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 029SGS168). Then, if the time-saving flag is on (step 029SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 029SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example by reading the stored value of the reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, and it is determined whether the reserved memory number of the identified variable special chart is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 029SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 029 SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 029 SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 029SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 029SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 029SGS172; N), the program selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable pattern (step 029SGS174), and proceeds to step 029SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS164, step 029SGS169, step 029SGS171, step 029SGS173, and step 029SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special win fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 029SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, step 029SGS175 determines the variation pattern, and determines whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, step 029SGS170 includes a process for determining whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a reach state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 029SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special patterns so that either a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B is started according to the variable special pattern designation buffer value (step 029SGS176). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 029SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special pattern starts to change (step 029SGS177). For example, when the special pattern change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the process of step 029SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 029SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result). After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step 029SGS179), and the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 029SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variable pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 11-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to display the stopped symbol (step 029SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 029SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set to the ON state (step 029SGS182). If the jackpot flag is set to the ON state (step 029SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to the OFF state (step 029SGS184) if they are set to the ON state, and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-probability variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 029SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 029 SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 029SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 029SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 029SGS189), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 029SGS182; N), in step 029SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving counter value is "0." If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step 029SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 029SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving counter is in a high base state with remaining time-saving times, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 029SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 029SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 029SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 029SGS193; Y), the process clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 029SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base state) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 029SGS195), and then proceeds to step 029SGS196.

In step 029SGS196, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figure 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 029SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 029SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 029SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 029SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 029SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 029SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; N), the variable jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS208), the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 029SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; Y), steps 029SGS211 and 029SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

In step 029SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 029SGS214). Then, after sending a game state command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 029SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 029SGS216).

Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 6 as the advance notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-20, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS241), and determines whether there is a new command stored at the start win by checking whether there is an entry in which the pending display flag value is not set (step 029SGS242).

If there is no entry with the reserved display flag value not set (step 029SGS242; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry with the reserved display flag value not set (step 029SGS242; Y), it is further determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a miss (step 029SGS243). If the symbol designation command is other than the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 029SGS243; N), based on the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot, a pre-reading notice performance judgment table (not shown) is referenced to determine whether to execute a pre-reading notice performance and the display pattern when the pre-reading notice performance is executed (step 029SGS245).

In step 029SGS245, for example, the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21 (A) is used to determine whether or not to execute the preview performance and the display pattern (preview type). Specifically, two types of display patterns (preview types) for the preview performance are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue circle in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U, and when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in a red circle in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U.

In step 029SGS245, as shown in FIG. 11-21(A), for example, it is possible to determine not to execute the pre-reading preview performance 5% of the time, to execute the pre-reading preview performance in display pattern α 30% of the time, and to execute the pre-reading preview performance in display pattern β 65% of the time.

Also, in step 029SGS243, if the symbol designation command of an entry for which the pending display flag value is not set is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command indicating a miss (step 029SGS243; Y), the variable category indicated by the variable category designation command of the entry is identified (step 029SGS247). Specifically, if the variable category designation command of the entry is C600H, it is identified as the category of the "non-reach" variable pattern, if it is C601H, it is identified as the category of the "super reach" variable pattern, and if it is C602H, it is identified as the category of the "other" variable pattern which includes normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 029SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 029SGS247, the pre-reading preview performance judgment table for misses (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) when the pre-reading preview performance is executed (step 029SGS248).

In step 029SGS248, the display pattern (preview type) and whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance are determined using a determination ratio such as that shown in FIG. 11-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21(B), the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (preview type) is varied depending on the category of the variation pattern identified in the processing of step 029SGS247.

In step 029SGS247, as shown in FIG. 11-21(B), for example, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is "non-reach", it is determined at a rate of 95% not to execute the look-ahead preview performance, at a rate of 5% to execute the look-ahead preview performance with display pattern α, and at a rate of 0% to execute the look-ahead preview performance with display pattern β. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is "other", it is determined at a rate of 75% not to execute the look-ahead preview performance with display pattern α, and at a rate of 20% to execute the look-ahead preview performance with display pattern β, and at a rate of 5%. And, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is "super reach", it is determined at a rate of 65% not to execute the look-ahead preview performance, at a rate of 25% to execute the look-ahead preview performance with display pattern α, and at a rate of 10% to execute the look-ahead preview performance.

With this setting, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead preview performance, the variable display result is more likely to be a jackpot than when it is decided not to execute the look-ahead preview performance, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance. Furthermore, when the look-ahead preview performance is executed, the variable display result is more likely to be a jackpot when the look-ahead preview performance is executed in display pattern β than when it is executed in display pattern α, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to which display pattern the reserved memory display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance will be displayed in.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern are determined at the same rate regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading preview performance and the determination rate of the display pattern may be different depending on the jackpot type. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which jackpot type jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether the pre-reading preview performance is executed or which display pattern the reserved memory display is displayed in.

After executing step 029SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a decision was made in step 029SGS247 to execute a pre-reading preview performance, i.e., whether or not the display pattern (preview type) was decided to be either display pattern α or display pattern β (step 029SGS249).

After step 029SGS245 is executed or if it is determined that a preview performance is to be executed (step 029SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 029SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (preview type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is display pattern α that indicates the pending memory display with a blue circle, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and if the display pattern (preview type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is display pattern β that indicates the pending memory display with a red circle, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS252.

Also, in step 029SGS249, if it has not been decided that a preview performance will be performed (step 029SGS249; N), the pending display flag for that entry is set to "0", which indicates a white circle (step 029SGS250), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS252.

After executing step 029SGS246 or step 029SGS250, the performance control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the "0", "1", or "2" set in the hold display flag.

Figure 11-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of Figure 10 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 11-22, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 029SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 029SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable start command reception flag is off in step 029SGS271 (step 029SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is off (step 029SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 029SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 029SGS272 or step 029SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 029SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 029SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 029SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to "7" as the stop symbol. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbol is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to even symbols as the stop symbol. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, a combination of decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a reach-miss combination (a miss pattern) in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different is determined as the stopping pattern.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a meter performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute a meter performance and the performance pattern (step 029SGS277), and judges whether or not the change pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach change pattern (step 029SGS278). Note that whether or not the change pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach change pattern can be determined by whether or not the change pattern designation command read in the processing of step 029SGS275 is a Super Reach change pattern.

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS278; N), proceed to step 029SGS283. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS278; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of the super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS280).

If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, Super Reach ζ, Super Reach η, or Super Reach λ (step 029 SGS280; N), it is further determined whether the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ or Super Reach ζ (step 029 SGS281). If the change pattern of the variable display is that of a Super Reach δ or Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS281; Y), a reach performance E development suggestion effect determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a reach performance E development suggestion effect, and the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 (step 029SGS282); if the change pattern of the variable display is that of a Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach η, or Super Reach λ (step 029SGS281; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 without executing a reach performance E development notification effect determination process.

In addition, in the processing of step 029SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern and proceeds to step 029SGS289.

Then, in step 029SGS280, if the change pattern of the variable display is any one of the change patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ (step 029SGS280; Y), a branch destination suggestion effect determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern (step 029SGS284). Then, it is determined whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach ε or Super Reach θ (step 029SGS285).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is one of the Super Reach γ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS285; N), proceed to step 029SGS289. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is one of the Super Reach ε or Super Reach θ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS285; Y), execute a reach performance G development suggestion performance decision process to determine whether or not to execute a reach performance G development suggestion performance (step 029SGS286). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines the reach performance of the super reach to be executed during the variable display from reach performance C and reach performance D according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS287), selects a process table according to the determined reach performance and fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS289 (step 029SGS288).

In the processing of step 029SGS287, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 11-30(A), if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach γ (PB1-4), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 50%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach θ (PB1-7), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 70%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ι (PB1-8), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 100%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach κ (PB1-9), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach γ (PA2-4), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 90%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ε (PA2-6), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 80%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 20%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach θ (PA2-9), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 30%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ι (PA2-10), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 100%. Furthermore, if the fluctuation pattern is that of Super Reach κ (PA2-11), the execution of reach performance C is determined with a probability of 60%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined with a probability of 40%.

As shown in Fig. 11-30(A) and Fig. 11-30(B), by determining the execution of reach performance C and reach performance D at different rates according to the variation pattern when the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, the overall expectation of a jackpot is set higher for reach performance D than for reach performance C, as shown in Fig. 11-30(C).

In addition, regardless of the variable display result, when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which a reach performance H development notification performance and a reach performance H are executed after the execution of a pre-performance and a premonition performance), the execution of a reach performance D is always decided. On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which a high expectation reach performance development notification performance and a reach performance I are executed after the execution of a pre-performance and a premonition performance), there are cases in which a reach performance C or a reach performance D is executed.

In other words, in this feature section 029SG, for the variation patterns in which the pre-performance and premonition performance are executed during the variable display (the variation patterns of the Super Reach ι and the Super Reach κ), the rate at which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed in this feature section 029 after the execution of the pre-performance and premonition performance (the rate at which the reach performance I with the highest expectation of a jackpot is executed) is set higher when the execution of the reach performance C is decided than when the execution of the reach performance D is decided. Therefore, in this feature section 029SG, even if the reach performance C with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance D is executed during the variable display, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the pre-performance and premonition performance are executed after the reach performance C, so that it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the expectation of a jackpot is low at the time the reach performance C is executed, and thus preventing a decrease in interest in the game during the execution of the reach performance C.

Furthermore, when comparing the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ, in which the variable display result is first announced as reach performance C or reach performance D and then a reach performance G development announcement performance is executed, with the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ, in which a pre-performance, a precursor performance, and a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance are executed in place of reach performance C or reach performance D while these are being executed, as shown in Figure 11-30 (D), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ is set to 60%. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (E), when the variable display result is a miss, the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ is set to 20%.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach θ and the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach κ can be inferred, depending on whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, as to whether the variable display is a variable display of the super reach κ in which a pre-performance, a precursor performance, and a high expectation reach performance notification performance are executed while reach performance C or reach performance D is being executed, or a variable display of the super reach θ in which a reach performance G development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (miss) is once notified as reach performance C or reach performance D, so that the player can pay attention to whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, which can increase the interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 11-22, in step 029SGS289, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a chance-up presentation determination process to determine whether or not to execute a chance-up presentation that indicates an increase in the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the expected probability of a jackpot) during the variable display, and to determine the presentation pattern of the chance-up presentation (step 029SGS289).

After executing the chance-up effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 then starts the process timer corresponding to the process timer selected in the processing of step 029SGS283 or step 029SGS288 (step 029SGS290).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 213 SGS288). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R (step 029 SGS290).

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 029SGS292). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 029SGS293). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display in progress performance process (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 213SGS291).

In addition, during the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 each time the variable display performance process is executed, and determines whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to that process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data. In this way, the variable display of the decorative pattern in this feature part 029SG is executed.

Figure 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S029SGS277 of Figure 11-22 as the meter performance determination processing. In the meter performance determination processing shown in Figure 11-23, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is any one of the change patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ (step 029SGS301). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is any one of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ (step 029 SGS301; Y), the meter performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any one of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, shortened non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029 SGS301; N), it is determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS302).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS302; Y), the meter performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of the non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS302; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a meter performance and the performance pattern according to the fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-24 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach (non-reach without shortening) fluctuation pattern, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 90%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 10%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 20%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 25%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 50%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 5%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is any of the Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, and Super Reach ζ fluctuation patterns, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 10%, meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 5%, meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 15%, meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 40%, meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 30%, meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is that of super reach η, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 5%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 5%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 95%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 100%.

As shown in Figures 11-24(B) and 11-25, pattern A in the meter performance is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (the period from the start of the variable display to the announcement of the variable display result in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern without shortening), pattern B is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (the period from the start of the variable display to the announcement of the variable display result in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern without shortening) (a total of two steps increase), and pattern C is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing, the second timing, and at the third timing during the period from the reach to the start of the reach performance of the super reach (the period from the reach to the announcement of the variable display result in the case of a normal reach fluctuation pattern).

Pattern D is a presentation pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, and the fourth timing when reach performance A or reach performance B is being executed (a total of four steps).Pattern E is a presentation pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, the fourth timing, and the fifth timing after the fourth timing when reach performance A is being executed (a timing before the start of the high expectation reach performance start/stop notification performance).Pattern F is a presentation pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by five steps at the second timing.

Returning to FIG. 11-23, after executing the process of 029SGS303, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a meter performance (step 029SGS304). If it has not decided to execute a meter performance (step 029SGS304; N), the meter performance decision process ends. If it has decided to execute a meter performance (step 029SGS304; Y), the decided performance pattern of the meter performance is stored (step 029SGS305), a meter performance start waiting timer corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set, and the meter performance decision process ends (step 029SGS306).

When it has been decided that a meter performance will be performed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the meter performance start waiting timer by 1 each time it executes the performance process during variable display, and determines whether the value of the meter performance start waiting timer has timed out. If the meter performance start waiting timer has timed out, it selects a meter performance process table corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined meter performance, and starts the meter performance process timer. Thereafter, it decrements the value of the meter performance process timer by 1 each time it executes the performance process during variable display, and determines whether the meter performance process timer has timed out. If the meter performance process timer has not timed out, it executes control of the performance device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the meter performance process timer, and if the meter performance process timer has timed out, it switches the process data and starts the next process data. In this way, it is possible to perform a meter performance during variable display.

As described above, in this feature section 029SG, by executing a meter effect during variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to five stages, and whether or not a high expectation reach effect development effect is executed as a result of the meter 029SG005M increasing to five stages.

Figure 11-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS282 of Figure 11-22 as the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision process. In the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision process shown in Figure 11-26, the performance control CPU 120 first decides whether or not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance according to the change pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS311). For example, as shown in Figure 11-26 (B), if the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach δ, it decides not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 50% of the time, and decides to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 50% of the time. On the other hand, if the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach ζ, it decides not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 20% of the time, and decides to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 80% of the time.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided in the processing of step 029SGS311 that the reach performance E development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS312). If it has not been decided that the reach performance E development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS312; N), the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated, and if it has been decided that the reach performance E development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS312; Y), the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer is set and the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated (step 029SGS313).

When it has been decided that the reach performance E development suggestion performance will be executed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the performance processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether the value of the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out. At this time, if the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out, a process table for the reach performance E development suggestion performance is selected, and the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer is started. After that, the value of the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer is decremented by 1 each time the performance processing during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has timed out. If the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer, and if the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. In this way, the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature part 029SG, the reach performance E development suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate in the variable display in the Super Reach ζ variation pattern in which the reach performance E development notification effect is executed than in the variable display in the Super Reach δ variation pattern in which the reach performance E development notification effect is not executed. Therefore, in the variable display in these Super Reach δ and Super Reach ζ variation patterns, the player is drawn to whether or not the reach performance E development suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the reach performance B, which increases the interest in the game.

Figure 11-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS284 of Figure 11-22 as the branch destination suggestion effect determination process. In the branch destination suggestion effect determination process shown in Figure 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS321).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-28(A), when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach γ, the branch destination suggestion effect is not executed 90% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern X 10% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Y 0% of the time, and the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z 0% of the time. Also, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ε, the branch destination suggestion effect is not executed 70% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern X 30% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Y 0% of the time, and the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z 0% of the time.

In addition, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach θ, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed at a rate of 50%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X at a rate of 30%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y at a rate of 15%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ι, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed at a rate of 10%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X at a rate of 10%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y at a rate of 70%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z at a rate of 10%. Furthermore, if the variation pattern of the variable display is that of a super reach κ, the branch destination suggestion effect is not executed at a rate of 10%, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern X at a rate of 30%, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Y at a rate of 20%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (B), pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is a presentation pattern in which the image display device 5 displays a branch destination suggestion image X suggesting the execution of both a reach performance H development notification effect and a high expectation reach performance development notification effect during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D, pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is a presentation pattern in which the image display device 5 displays a branch destination suggestion image Y suggesting the execution of a reach performance H development notification effect during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D, and pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is a presentation pattern in which the image display device 5 displays a branch destination suggestion image Z suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification effect during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

In this characteristic part 029SG, among patterns X to Z, pattern Z is determined to be executed at a higher rate than patterns X and Y when a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed. In other words, pattern Z is a performance pattern with a higher expectation of execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification performance than patterns X and Y (execution expectation of high expectation reach performance development notification performance: pattern Z > pattern Y, pattern Z > pattern X). In addition, pattern Y is determined to be executed at a higher rate than patterns X and X when a reach performance H development notification performance is executed. In other words, pattern Y is a performance pattern with a higher expectation of execution of a reach performance H development notification performance than patterns X and Z (execution expectation of reach performance H development notification performance: pattern Y > pattern Z, pattern Y > pattern X).

As shown in FIG. 11-28(A), the decision ratio of whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed and the presentation pattern differs depending on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, not depending on the variable display result. In other words, the decision ratio of whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed and the presentation pattern is determined depending on whether or not it develops into any of reach presentations G to I after reach presentation C or reach presentation D is executed, and which of reach presentations G to I it develops into, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decision ratio of whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed and the presentation pattern may differ depending on both the fluctuation pattern of the variable display and the variable display result, or may differ only depending on the variable display result.

Returning to FIG. 11-27, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided in the processing of step 029SGS321 that a branch destination suggestion presentation should be executed (step 029SGS232). If it has not been decided that a branch destination suggestion presentation should be executed (step 029SGS232; N), the branch destination suggestion presentation determination processing is terminated. If it has been decided that a branch destination suggestion presentation should be executed (step 029SGS232; Y), the presentation pattern of the decided branch destination suggestion presentation is stored (step 029SGS323), a timer for waiting for the start of the branch destination suggestion presentation is set, and the branch destination suggestion presentation determination processing is terminated (step 029SGS324).

When it has been decided that a branch destination suggestion performance will be performed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the branch destination suggestion performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the performance process during variable display is performed, and determines whether the value of the branch destination suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out. If the branch destination suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out, a branch destination suggestion performance process table corresponding to the determined performance pattern of the branch destination suggestion performance is selected, and the branch destination suggestion performance process timer is started. Thereafter, the value of the branch destination suggestion performance process timer is decremented by 1 each time the performance process during variable display is performed, and it is determined whether the branch destination suggestion performance process timer has timed out. If the branch destination suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the branch destination suggestion performance process timer, and if the branch destination suggestion performance process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. In this way, a branch destination suggestion performance can be performed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature part 029SG, by displaying any one of the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, and branch destination suggestion image Z on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach performance C or reach performance D, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is not notified as the reach performance C or reach performance D and the game switches to the pre-performance. Furthermore, depending on whether the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, or branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach performance C or reach performance D, the rate at which the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the pre-performance and the precursor performance and the rate at which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed differ, so that the player can also pay attention to whether the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, or branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5, which increases the interest in the game.

Figure 11-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS286 of Figure 11-22 as the reach performance G development suggestion performance determination process. In the reach performance G development suggestion performance determination process shown in Figure 11-29, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-29(B), when the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach ε, the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 50% of the time, and the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined to be executed 50% of the time. Also, when the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach θ, the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 20% of the time, and the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined to be executed 80% of the time.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided in the processing of step 029SGS331 that the reach performance G development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS332). If it has not been decided that the reach performance G development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS332; N), the reach performance G development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated, and if it has been decided that the reach performance G development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS332; Y), the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer is set and the reach performance G development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated (step 029SGS333).

When it has been decided that the reach performance G development suggestion performance will be executed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the performance processing during the variable display is executed, and determines whether the value of the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out. At this time, if the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out, the CPU 120 selects a process table for the reach performance G development suggestion performance and starts the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer. After that, the CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer by 1 each time the performance processing during the variable display is executed, and determines whether the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer has timed out. If the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the CPU 120 executes control of the performance device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer, and if the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer has timed out, the CPU 120 switches the process data and starts the next process data. In this way, the reach performance G development suggestion performance can be executed during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature part 029SG, the reach performance E development suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate in the variable display in the super reach θ variation pattern in which the reach performance G notification effect is executed than in the variable display in the super reach ε variation pattern in which the reach performance G development notification effect is not executed. Therefore, in the variable display in these super reach ε and super reach θ variation patterns, the player is drawn to the fact that whether or not the reach performance G development suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the reach performance C or reach performance D is made possible, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Figure 11-31 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS289 of Figure 11-22 as the chance-up effect determination process. In the chance-up effect determination process shown in Figure 11-31, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS340). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS340; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern, it further determines whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach λ fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS341).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS341; Y), the chance-up performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is not the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS341; N), it is further determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS342).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is any one of the Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, Super Reach ζ, Super Reach η, and Super Reach λ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS342; N), it is further determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach α or a Super Reach η fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS343). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach α or a Super Reach η fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS343; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance A and the performance pattern according to the variable display result (step 029SGS344).

Here, the contents of reach performance A to reach performance I in this characteristic part 029SG will be explained based on Fig. 11-32(A) to Fig. 11-32(E). As shown in Fig. 11-32(A) to Fig. 11-32(I), reach performance A to reach performance I are each composed of a reach title display period in which the title of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5, followed by a battle performance execution period in which a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed on the image display device 5.

During the reach title display period of each of these reach effects A to I, the reach title can be displayed in red as part of the chance-up effect (see Figure 11-33 (A)).

In addition, for the battle performance execution period of reach performance A to reach performance D, a movable body operation possible period in which the movable body 32 can be operated and a cut-in image display possible period in which a cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5 are provided in the first half of the battle performance execution period, and it is possible to execute the movement of the movable body 32 in the movable body operation possible period and the display of a cut-in image in the cut-in image display possible period as part of the chance-up performance (see FIG. 11-33 (A)).

In addition, for the battle performance periods of reach performance C and reach performance D, a period in which the branch destination suggestion performance can be executed is provided after the period in which the movable object can be operated and the period in which the cut-in image can be displayed.

In addition, with regard to the battle execution period of reach performance E and reach performance F, a movable body operation period is provided in the first half of the battle performance execution period, and an operation promotion image display period is provided in the second half of the battle performance execution period (near the end timing of the battle performance) during which an operation promotion image is displayed to encourage the player to operate the push button 31B or stick controller 31A in order to notify the player of the variable display result in response to the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A on the image display device 5. Note that the operation promotion image display period is usually the period during which the image of the push button 31B is displayed.

In this feature part 029SG, during the battle execution period of reach performance E and reach performance F, it is possible to execute the movement of the movable body during the movable body operable period and to display an image of the stick controller 31A during the operation prompting image display period as part of the chance-up performance (see FIG. 11-33 (B)).

Note that there is no movable object operable period, no cut-in image display period, and no operation prompting image display period for reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I. In other words, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I are reach performances in which the chance-up performance is never executed.

Returning to step 029SGS344 in FIG. 11-31, as shown in FIG. 11-34(A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the chance up effect with a probability of 60%, to execute the chance up effect with pattern P with a probability of 35%, to execute the chance up effect with pattern Q with a probability of 5%, and to execute the chance up effect with pattern R with a probability of 0%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect determines not to execute the chance up effect with pattern P with a probability of 35%, to execute the chance up effect with pattern Q with a probability of 60%, and to execute the chance up effect with pattern R with a probability of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; N), it proceeds to step 029SGS347. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; Y), it stores the decided effect pattern and sets a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect A according to the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS347 (step 029SGS346).

In step 029SGS347, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach α (step 029SGS347; N), the chance up performance determination process is terminated, and if the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347; Y), the presence or absence of chance up performance during the execution of reach performance F and the performance pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS348).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(B), if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 30% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 20% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 10% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 20% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 30% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 40% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349; N), the chance-up effect decision process is terminated. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored, and a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect F is set according to the fluctuation pattern, and the chance-up effect decision process is terminated (step 029SGS350).

In addition, if the change pattern of the variable display in step 029SGS343 is any of Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, and Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS343; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance B and the performance pattern according to the variable display result (step 029SGS351).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(C), if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P 30% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q 20% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R 10% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P 20% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q 30% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R 40% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect during the execution of reach effect B (step 029SGS352). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect during the execution of reach effect B (step 029SGS352; N), it proceeds to step 029SGS354. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect during the execution of reach effect B (step 029SGS352; Y), it stores the decided effect pattern and sets a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect B according to the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS354 (step 029SGS353).

In step 029SGS354, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS354). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach β or Super Reach δ (step 029SGS354; N), the chance up performance determination process is terminated, and if the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS354; Y), the presence or absence of chance up performance during the execution of Reach performance E and the performance pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS355).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(D), if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 60% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 5% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 0% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 5% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 60% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 0% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356; N), the chance-up effect decision process is terminated. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored, and a chance-up effect start timer for the reach effect E is set according to the fluctuation pattern, and the chance-up effect decision process is terminated (step 029SGS357).

In addition, if the variable display change pattern in the processing of step 029SGS342 is one of the Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ change patterns (step 029SGS342; Y), the performance control CPU 120 further determines whether the variable display change pattern is one of the Super Reach γ and Super Reach ε change patterns (step 029SGS358).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is one of the Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS358; N), the chance-up performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is one of the Super Reach γ or Super Reach ε fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS358; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D, and the performance pattern, depending on the variable display result (step 029 SGS359).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(A), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect C, if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 60% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 5% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 0% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 5% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 60% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 0% of the time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-34(C), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect D, if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 30% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 20% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 10% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 20% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 30% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 40% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect C or reach effect D is being executed (step 029SGS360). If it has not decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect C or reach effect D is being executed (step 029SGS360; N), it ends the chance-up effect decision process, and if it has decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect C or reach effect D is being executed (step 029SGS360; Y), it stores the decided effect pattern and sets a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect C or reach effect D according to the fluctuation pattern, and ends the chance-up effect decision process (step 029SGS361).

When it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the chance-up effect start waiting timer by 1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether the chance-up effect start waiting timer has timed out. If the chance-up effect start waiting timer has timed out, a process table for the chance-up effect is selected, and the chance-up effect process timer is started. Thereafter, the value of the chance-up effect process timer is decremented by 1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and a determination is made as to whether the chance-up effect process timer has timed out. If the chance-up effect process timer has not timed out, the effect control device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the chance-up effect process timer, and if the chance-up effect process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. In this way, a chance-up effect can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature section 029SG, the likelihood of a jackpot varies depending on whether or not a chance up effect is executed and the number of times the chance up effect is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, so that the player can pay attention to the number of times the chance up effect is executed and whether or not the chance up effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in reach effects such as reach effects A to D, which have a relatively low probability of winning, a maximum of three chance-up effects are executed, so that during the execution of reach effects A to D, the player can be effectively suggested that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the number of chance-up effects executed.

On the other hand, in reach effects with a high probability of winning, such as reach effects G to I, the chance-up effect can only be executed once during the reach effect, so that the interest in the reach effect with a high probability of winning is prevented from decreasing by executing the chance-up effect multiple times unnecessarily.

As shown in FIG. 11-34 (E), among the presentation patterns of the chance-up presentations in reach presentations A to D, pattern P is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red but the movable body 32 does not move and the cut-in image is not displayed, pattern Q is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 moves but the cut-in image is not displayed, and pattern R is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red, the movable body 32 moves, and the cut-in image is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (F), among the presentation patterns of the chance-up presentation in reach presentation E and reach presentation F, pattern S is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red but the movable body 32 is not moved and the image of the stick controller 31A is not displayed, pattern Q is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 is moved but the image of the stick controller 31A is not displayed, and pattern R is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red, the movable body 32 is moved, and the image of the stick controller 31A is all displayed.

As described above, as shown in Fig. 11-34(A) to Fig. 11-34(D), in the chance up performance of this feature part 029SG, the chance up performance in reach performance A to reach performance D as a whole has the lowest jackpot expectation when the chance up performance is not executed, and when the chance up performance is executed in pattern P, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance up performance is not executed. When the chance up performance is executed in pattern Q, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance up performance is executed in pattern P. And when the chance up performance is executed in pattern R, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance up performance is executed in pattern Q (jackpot expectation of chance up performance in reach performance A to reach performance D: pattern R > pattern Q > pattern P > non-execution).

In addition, for the chance up effects in reach effects E and reach effects F as a whole, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the chance up effect is not executed, and the jackpot expectation is set to be higher when the chance up effect is executed in pattern S than when the chance up effect is not executed. When the chance up effect is executed in pattern T, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up effect is executed in pattern S. And when the chance up effect is executed in pattern RU, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up effect is executed in pattern T (jackpot expectation for chance up effects in reach effects E and reach effects F: pattern U > pattern T > pattern S > not executed).

Comparing the cases where reach performance A to reach performance D are executed with the cases where reach performance E or reach performance F is executed, in reach performance A to reach performance D, pattern P and pattern Q are set as commonly executable performance patterns, while pattern R is executable only when reach performance B or reach performance D is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are performances that can be executed in any of reach performance A to reach performance D, while the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 is a performance that can be executed only in reach performance B and reach performance D.

Furthermore, comparing the case where reach performance E is executed with the case where reach performance F is executed, in reach performance E and reach performance F, pattern S and pattern T are set as commonly executable performance patterns, while pattern U is executable only when reach performance F is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are performances that can be executed in either reach performance E or reach performance F, while the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image is a performance that can be executed only in reach performance F.

Next, the presentation of the variable display of the Super Reach in this feature part 029SG will be explained based on Fig. 11-35 to Fig. 11-56. First, a case where Reach presentation A is executed as the reach presentation of the Super Reach will be explained. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as not having increased by even one step. As shown in Fig. 11-35(A) to Fig. 11-35(D), when it is decided to execute the meter presentation at the start of the variable display (this feature part 029SG shows the case where execution of pattern D or pattern E is decided), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first and second timings before the reach and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in Figures 11-35 (E) and 11-35 (F), when reach performance A starts, the image display device 5 first displays a title image of the reach performance A and an expectation image 029SG251 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance A. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG161A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance A, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, a title image 029SG161B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance A.

When the display of the title image of reach effect A ends, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 11-35(G). Note that, even during the battle effect, the meter 029SG005M increases by another step at the fourth timing, as shown in FIG. 11-36(H).

In addition, during the battle performance, if it is decided to execute a chance-up performance in the performance pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, the movement of the movable body 32 from the origin position toward the performance position is executed as shown in FIG. 11-36 (I). Note that the movement of the movable body 32 as a chance-up performance is a movement from the origin position toward the performance position, but the movement of the movable body 32 ends at a position intermediate between the origin position and the performance position. The movable body 32 then returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 will be displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 11-36 (J) and 11-36 (K).

When the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach α Miss Variable Pattern (PA2-2), as shown in FIG. 11-36 (L) and FIG. 11-36 (M), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character A is defeated by enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance A) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), as shown in Figures 11-36 (N) and 11-36 (O), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character A defeats enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance A) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a Super Reach η variable display, as shown in Figures 11-37 (P) and 11-37 (Q), at the fifth timing after the end of the cut-in image display period, the meter 029SG005M increases by another step (up to five steps) and becomes full. Then, a caption image 029SG005T is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 to inform the player that the meter 029SG005M has increased to five steps (become full) and to inform the player that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (R), the battle presentation is interrupted midway, and instead of the battle presentation, the high expectation reach presentation development notification image 029SG180 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high expectation reach presentation development notification presentation. Then, the reach presentation F is started. Details of the high expectation reach presentation development notification presentation will be described later in FIG. 11-55.

As shown in Figures 11-37 (S) and 11-37 (T), when reach performance F starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image of the reach performance F and an expectation image 029SG256 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance A. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG166A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance F, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern S, Pattern T, or Pattern U, a title image 029SG166B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance F.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect F ends, a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character B begins, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (U). During the battle effect, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern T or pattern U, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position toward the intermediate position, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (V) and FIG. 11-36 (W). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in Figures 11-38 (X), 11-38 (Y), and 11-38 (Z), an operation prompting image is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up performance has not been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation prompting image, whereas if the execution of the chance-up performance has been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation prompting image.

After the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates an operation means such as the push button 31B or stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period for these operation means ends, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the battle performance.

Specifically, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach η miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-8), as shown in Figures 11-39(a) and 11-39(b), the result of the battle performance is that ally character B is defeated by enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance F) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach η jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-6), as shown in Figures 11-39(c) and 11-39(d), the result of the battle presentation is that ally character B wins over enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation F) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Next, we will explain the case where reach performance B is executed as the reach performance of the super reach. Note that the meter 029SG005M is displayed as not having increased by even one step at the start timing of the variable display. As shown in Figures 11-40(A) to 11-40(D), when it is decided to execute the meter performance at the start of the variable display (this feature part 029SG discloses the case where execution of pattern D or pattern E is decided), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, which is the timing before the reach, the second timing, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in Figures 11-40 (E) and 11-40 (F), when reach performance B starts, the image display device 5 first displays a title image of the reach performance B and an expectation image 029SG252 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance B. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG162A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance B, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, a title image 029SG162B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance B.

When the display of the title image of reach effect B ends, a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (G). Note that, even during the battle effect, the meter 029SG005M increases by another step at the fourth timing, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (H).

In addition, during the battle presentation, if it is determined that a chance-up presentation is to be performed in the presentation pattern of Pattern Q or Pattern R, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position to the intermediate position, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (I). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 will be displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 11-41 (J) and 11-41 (K).

When the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach β miss variable pattern (PA2-3), as shown in Figures 11-41 (L) and 11-41 (M), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character B is defeated by enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance B) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), as shown in Figures 11-41 (N) and 11-41 (O), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character B defeats enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation B) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a Super Reach δ or Super Reach ζ variable display, as shown in Figures 11-42 (P) and 11-42 (Q), after the end of the period during which the cut-in image can be displayed, friendly character B is defeated by enemy character A, and the player is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

After the battle performance (reach performance B) ends, a swinging display is performed with a combination that indicates a loss of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided that a reach performance E development suggestion performance will be performed, a reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed so that the display position of the decorative symbols overlaps in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance E development suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (R).

When the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach δ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (S), after the reach performance E development suggestion performance execution period, the swinging of the decorative pattern stops and it is notified again that the variable display is a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ζ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (T), after the reach performance E development suggestion performance execution period, a reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed as a reach performance E development notification performance. Then, the reach performance E starts.

As shown in Figures 11-42 (U) and 11-42 (V), when the reach performance E starts, the image display device 5 first displays a title image of the reach performance E and an expectation image 029SG255 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance E. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG165A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance E, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern S, Pattern T, or Pattern U, a title image 029SG165B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance E.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect E ends, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B begins, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (W). During the battle effect, if the execution of a chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern T or pattern U, an action (movement) of the movable body 32 is executed from the origin position toward the intermediate position, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (X) and FIG. 11-43 (Y). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in Figures 11-43(Z), 11-43(a), and 11-43(b), an operation prompting image is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. Note that at this time, if the execution of the chance-up performance has not been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation prompting image, whereas if the execution of the chance-up performance has been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation prompting image.

After the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates an operation means such as the push button 31B or stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period for these operation means ends, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the battle performance.

Specifically, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach ζ miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-7), as shown in Figures 11-44(c) and 11-44(d), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character A is defeated by enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance E) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ζ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5), as shown in Figures 11-44(e) and 11-44(f), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character A defeats enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation E) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Here, we will explain in more detail the presentation mode of the reach presentation E development suggestion presentation shown in Figure 11-42 (Q) to Figure 11-42 (T).

First, as shown in Fig. 11-45(A) to Fig. 11-45(B), when it has been decided to execute a reach performance E development suggestion effect, in a state where the decorative symbols are displayed oscillatingly in a combination indicating a miss, the first stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance E development suggestion effect. Note that the first stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be an image that is less visible to the player, such as having a lower brightness or fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols.

After the first display period of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 ends, as shown in Fig. 11-45(C) to Fig. 11-45(D), the display of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 ends once, and then the second stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. Note that the second stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be an image that is more visible to the player than the first stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170, such as being brighter or having more display colors than the first stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the Super Reach δ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), the display of the Reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 on the image display device 5 is not executed as the Reach performance E development notification performance, and the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the Super Reach ζ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-45(F), the Reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the Reach performance E development notification performance, and the Reach performance E is executed.

Next, we will explain the case where reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach. Note that when reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach, the meter performance is not executed, so the explanation of the period from the start of the variable display to the reach will be omitted.

When reach performance C is executed, as shown in Fig. 11-46(A) to Fig. 11-46(C), when reach performance C starts, the title image of the reach performance C and the expectation image 029SG253 showing the expectation of a big win of the reach performance C are displayed on the image display device 5 first. At this time, if the execution of the chance up performance has not been decided, the title image 029SG163A with the title letters in black is displayed as the title image of the reach performance C, whereas if the execution of the chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, the title image 029SG163B with the title letters in red is displayed as the title image of the reach performance C.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect C ends, a battle effect between ally character C and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (C).

On the other hand, when reach performance D is executed, as shown in Fig. 11-46(D) to Fig. 11-46(F), when reach performance D starts, the title image of the reach performance D and the expectation image 029SG254 showing the expectation of a big win of the reach performance D are displayed on the image display device 5 first. At this time, if the execution of the chance up performance has not been decided, the title image 029SG164A with the title letters in black is displayed as the title image of the reach performance D, while if the execution of the chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, the title image 029SG164B with the title letters in red is displayed as the title image of the reach performance D.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect D ends, a battle effect between ally character D and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (F).

In addition, during the battle effects of reach effects C or reach effects D, if it is decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position to the intermediate position, as shown in Figure 11-47 (G) and Figure 11-47 (H). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 will be displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 11-47 (I) and 11-47 (J).

Also, as shown in Figures 11-47 (K) to 11-47- (M), if it has been decided that a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed, after the period during which a cut-in image can be displayed during the battle effect of reach effect C or reach effect D, the image display device 5 will display, as a branch destination suggestion effect, one of the following images: a branch destination suggestion image X (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X) suggesting that both a reach effect H development notification effect (reach effect H) will be executed and a high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) will be executed; a branch destination suggestion image Y (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y) suggesting that a reach effect H development notification effect (reach effect H) will be executed; or a branch destination suggestion image Z (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z) suggesting that a high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) will be executed.

After the period in which the branch destination suggestion effect can be executed, if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach γ miss variation pattern (PA2-4), as shown in Figures 11-48 (N) to 11-48 (P), if reach effect C is being executed, the result of the battle effect is that ally character C is defeated by enemy character A, thereby informing the player that the variable display is a miss, and if reach effect D is being executed, the result of the battle effect is that ally character D is defeated by enemy character A, thereby informing the player that the variable display is a miss. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display in the Super Reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4), as shown in Figures 11-48 (Q) to 11-48 (S), when reach performance C is being executed, the variable display notifies the player that it is a jackpot as a result of the battle performance that ally character C wins over enemy character A, and when reach performance D is being executed, the variable display notifies the player that it is a jackpot as a result of the battle performance that ally character D wins over enemy character A. Then, after the battle performance (reach performance C or reach performance D) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

In addition, if the variable display is a Super Reach ε or Super Reach θ variable display, as shown in Figure 11-49 (T) to Figure 11-49 (V), after the end of the period in which the branch destination suggestion performance can be executed, friendly character C or friendly character D is defeated by enemy character A, and the user is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

After the battle performance (reach performance C or reach performance D) ends, a swinging display is performed with a combination that indicates a loss of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided that a reach performance G development suggestion performance will be executed, a reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed so that the display position of the decorative symbols overlaps in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance G development suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (W).

When the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ε variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (X), after the reach performance G development suggestion performance execution period, the swinging of the decorative pattern stops and it is notified again that the variable display is a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach θ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (Y), after the reach performance G development suggestion performance execution period, the reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 is displayed as a reach performance G development notification performance. Then, the reach performance G starts.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(Z), when a reach effect G starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G and an expectation image 029SG257 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach effect G.

When the display of the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G ends, as shown in Figures 11-50(a) and 11-50(b), a battle effect between ally character C and enemy character B begins. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is the super reach θ miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-9), as shown in Figures 11-50(c) and 11-50(d), the result of the battle effect is that ally character C is defeated by enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle effect (reach effect G) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7), as shown in Figures 11-50 (e) and 11-50 (f), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character C defeats enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation G) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot.

Here, we will explain in more detail the presentation mode of the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation shown in Figure 11-49 (V) to Figure 11-49 (Y).

First, as shown in Fig. 11-54(A) to Fig. 11-54(B), when it has been decided to execute a reach performance G development suggestion effect, in a state where the decorative symbols are displayed oscillatingly in a combination indicating a miss, the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance G development suggestion effect. Note that the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 may be an image that is less visible to the player, such as having a lower brightness or fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols.

After the first display period of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 ends, as shown in Fig. 11-54(C) to Fig. 11-54(D), the display of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 ends once, and then the second stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. Note that the second stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 may be an image that is more visible to the player than the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171, such as being brighter or having more display colors than the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the Super Reach ε variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), the display of the reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 on the image display device 5 is not executed as the reach performance G development notification performance, and the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the Super Reach θ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-54(F), the display of the reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 on the image display device 5 is executed as the reach performance G development notification performance.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach ι variable pattern or a Super Reach κ variable pattern, as shown in Figures 11-51 (g) to 11-51 (h), after the period during which a branch destination suggestion effect can be executed while a reach effect C or reach effect D is being executed, a shutter image 029SG006 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-effect (the shutter image 029SG006 is moved from the left and right of the display area toward the center of the display area), and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 becomes temporarily invisible due to the shutter image 029SG006.

When the execution period of the pre-effect ends due to the passage of a predetermined period of time, the shutter image 029SG006 retreats from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to the left and right as a premonition effect, and the image of character C becomes visible to the player in the display area of the image display device 5 in response to the retreat of the shutter image 029SG006.

When the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach ι variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-51(i), a reach performance H development notification image 029SG183 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a reach performance H development notification performance, and then a reach performance H is executed. When the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach κ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-51(j), a high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and then a reach performance I is executed. Details of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be described later in FIG. 11-55.

When the variable display fluctuation pattern is a variable display with a Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-52 (k), when the reach performance H starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG168 of the reach performance H and an expectation image 029SG258 indicating the expectation of a jackpot for the reach performance H.

When the display of the title image 029SG168 of the reach performance H ends, as shown in FIG. 11-52(l) and FIG. 11-52(m), a battle performance between ally character D and enemy character C begins. If the variable display change pattern is a super reach i miss change pattern (PA2-10), as shown in FIG. 11-52(n) and FIG. 11-52(o), the result of the battle performance is that ally character D is defeated by enemy character C, and the variable display result is notified that it is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ι jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-8), as shown in Figure 11-52 (p) and Figure 11-52 (q), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character D defeats enemy character C, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot.

In addition, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is a variable display in the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, as shown in Fig. 11-53(r) to Fig. 11-53(s), when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG169 of the reach performance I and the expectation image 029SG259 showing the jackpot expectation of the reach performance I. At this time, the image display device 5 displays images of Characters A to C behind the title image 029SG169 and expectation image 029SG259 of the reach performance I, thereby creating a sense of exclusivity due to the fact that the reach performance I has a higher jackpot expectation than other Super Reach reach performances.

When the display of the title image 029SG169 of reach performance I ends, as shown in Figures 11-53(t) and 11-53(u), a battle performance begins between ally character A to ally character D and enemy character C. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach κ miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-11), as shown in Figures 11-53(v) and 11-53(w), the result of the battle performance is that ally character A to ally character D are defeated by enemy character C, and it is announced that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-9), as shown in Figures 11-53 (x) and 11-53 (y), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly characters A to D defeat enemy character C, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Here, we will explain in more detail the high-expectation reach performance development notification effects shown in Figures 11-37 (R) to 11-37 (T) and 11-53 (r) to 11-53 (s).

First, as shown in Figures 11-55(A) to 11-55(B), when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance starts, a high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that reach performance F or reach performance I will be executed. Furthermore, after the high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, a blackout performance is executed in which the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make it difficult to see the performance image displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the blackout effect, a darkened image is displayed on the image display device 5, making it difficult to see other effect images (such as the variable display images of decorative patterns and character images), and the brightness of the display screen itself is reduced, while the volume of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is reduced compared to before the high expectation reach effect development notification effect was executed. Furthermore, the amount of light emitted by the various light-emitting means (e.g., LEDs, etc.) provided in the game area, movable body 32, glass door frame, and game machine frame 3 is reduced compared to before the high expectation reach effect development notification effect was executed, making it even more difficult to see other effect images (such as the variable display images of decorative patterns and character images).

After the blackout effect is executed, an image of character C is displayed as a pre-effect, as shown in FIG. 11-55(C). In the pre-effect, the lines spoken by character C are displayed as text image 029SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the lines are output as audio information from speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 11-55(D) and FIG. 11-55(E), a switching performance is executed after the first performance ends, and a second performance is executed after the first performance ends. As the switching performance, an image different from the image of character C displayed in the first performance is displayed. Note that, in this feature section 029SG, an example is shown in which only one image is displayed as the switching performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of multiple images may be displayed as the switching performance. Note that, when any one of multiple images is displayed as the switching performance in this way, the proportion controlled to the jackpot game state may be made different depending on which image is displayed.

As mentioned above, in the latter stage performance, the lines spoken by the character are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as character image 029SG008, and the lines are output as audio information from speakers 8L, 8R. The character image 029SG008 displayed at this time has fewer characters than the character image 029SG007 displayed in the former stage performance, but each character is larger and brighter than the character image 029SG007 (see Figure 11-10).

As shown in FIG. 11-55(F), after the end of the latter stage performance, the movable body performance is executed. In this movable body performance, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position, which is located above the image display device 5, to a performance position overlapping with the approximate center position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 that has fallen to the performance position is moved back to the origin position by the drive of a drive motor (not shown) or the like.

After the movable body performance ends, as shown in FIG. 11-55 (G), a reach performance according to each variation pattern (if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach η variation pattern, then a reach performance F; if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach κ variation pattern, then a reach performance I) is executed.

Next, the variable display in the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern will be described. As shown in Figures 11-56(A) to 11-56(D), in the variable display in the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern, first, when the variable display starts, the meter 029SG005M increases all at once to the fifth stage and becomes full at the second timing before the reach. Next, a caption image 029SG005T is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 to inform the player that the meter 029SG005M has increased to the fifth stage (becomes full) and to inform the player that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed.

Then, the high expectation reach performance development notification effect is executed without a reach occurring or any of the reach performances A to D being executed. The presentation mode of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect is the same as the presentation mode described above in FIG. 11-55. After the high expectation reach performance development notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-53, reach performance I is executed and it is finally announced that the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is set to be longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance, and the length L11 of the period from when the reach performance E development notification performance starts until the reach performance E is executed and the variable display result of the reach performance E is notified that it is a jackpot as a result of the performance of the reach performance E is set to be longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance. Since the length of the period L12 until the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the result of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is set shorter than the length of the period L13 from the start of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance until the reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the result of the reach performance I, in the case where the reach performance E is executed after the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to an excessively long period until the variable display result is notified as a jackpot. Also, in the case where the reach performance I is executed after the execution of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, it is possible to appropriately draw the player's attention to the reach performance I until the variable display result is notified as a jackpot, thereby improving interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of reach performance B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of r-value performance A, so that the player can focus on reach performance B for a longer period than reach performance A, thereby increasing interest in the game. As shown in FIG. 11-7 to FIG. 11-9, unlike reach performance A, the reach performance B does not execute a development notification performance before the variable display result is notified as a performance result, so that even if the reach performance E development notification performance is not executed, it is possible to reliably draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result of the reach performance B will be notified that it is a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, while reach performance A or reach performance B is being executed, a meter performance may be executed as a performance suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification performance, so that the execution of the meter performance can arouse the player's anticipation that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, an example is given of a form in which a meter effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the meter effect, the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect may be suggested by the output mode of the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, a form in which the meter performance can be executed only when the reach performance A or the reach performance B is executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter performance can also be executed when the reach performance C or the reach performance D is executed. In particular, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ in which the pre-performance and the premonition performance are executed from the middle of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and then the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed, a case may be provided in which the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage (changes to a display mode that notifies the execution of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance) in response to the pre-performance or the premonition performance. In this way, the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ can draw the player's attention to whether the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage during the execution of the pre-performance or the premonition performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at once at the second timing without going through the execution of reach performance A, and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed. Therefore, even if reach performance A is not executed, the player can be drawn to the fact that the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, this feature section 029SG illustrates an example in which the high expectation reach performance development notification effect and reach performance I are not executed when reach performance B is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which the high expectation reach performance development notification effect and reach performance I are executed after reach performance B is executed. By doing this, even when reach performance B is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the high expectation reach performance development notification effect and reach performance I will be executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, the meter 029SG005M is shown to increase by one step at each of the first to fifth timings as an example of the meter performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M may increase by two or more steps at any timing. Furthermore, when the meter 029SG005M is increased by two or more steps at any of the first to fifth timings in this manner, the rate at which the meter 029SG005M progresses to reach performance I may differ between the case where the meter 029SG005M has increased to the fifth step before the start of reach performance A or reach performance B and the case where the meter 029SG005M has increased to the fifth step after the start of reach performance A or reach performance B. In addition, in this feature 029SG, the meter performance is exemplified as a form in which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five stages, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter performance may be such that the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed in four stages or less or six stages or more.

Also, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the period L13 from when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is started until reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is notified of a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance I is set to be longer than the length of the period L12 from when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is started until reach performance F is executed and the variable display result is notified of a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance F. Therefore, by lengthening the period until the performance result is notified when reach performance I with a higher expectation of a jackpot is executed, the sense of expectation of being controlled in a jackpot game state can be effectively increased.

As shown in Figures 11-23 to 11-25, the meter effect suggesting the execution of a high-expectation reach effect development notification effect in this feature part 029SG is an effect in which the display mode changes in stages over a maximum of five stages (six stages if the state in which the meter effect is not executed is included) from the first timing to the fifth timing of the variable display. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-45, the reach effect E development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of reach effect E in this feature part 029SG is an effect in which the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 changes over two stages. In other words, in this feature part 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can change up to five stages as a meter effect, but the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can only change up to two stages as a reach effect E development suggestion effect. For this reason, in meter effects, the image of the effect target (meter 029SG005M) is more likely to change to the fifth stage than in reach effect E development suggestion effects, so the player can pay attention to whether the meter 029SG005M will increase to the fifth stage, increasing interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five stages as a meter performance, while the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can only be changed up to two stages as a reach performance E development suggestion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to five stages as a reach performance E development suggestion performance. In this way, when the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to five stages as a reach performance E development suggestion performance, the rate at which the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 changes up to the fifth stage can be set lower than the rate at which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes up to the fifth stage.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ and Super Reach ζ, the length L5 of the period during which the meter effect can be executed is set longer than the length L6a of the period during which the reach effect E development suggestion effect can be executed, so that it is possible to suggest for a longer period that a reach effect F, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a reach effect A, will be executed after a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, compared to the execution of a reach effect E after the execution of a reach effect E development notification effect is suggested, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, an example is given in which the length L5 of the period in which the meter performance can be executed is set to be longer than the length L6a of the period in which the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the length L5 of the period in which the meter performance can be executed may be set to be shorter than the length L6a of the period in which the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed.

In addition, this characteristic part 029SG illustrates an example of a form in which the meter 029SG005M can be displayed on the image display device 5 even when it is not determined that a meter performance is to be performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 only when it is determined that a meter performance is to be performed. Furthermore, the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 for the first time at the timing of the first stage increase.

Furthermore, since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the result of the reach effect B, by executing the reach effect E development suggestion effect while the reach effect B is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the player realizing that the variable display result is not notified as a jackpot as the result of the reach effect B.

Note that in this feature part 029SG, the only pattern disclosed as a pattern for progressing from reach performance B to reach performance E is a pattern in which a reach performance E development notification performance and a reach performance E are executed after a variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance B (see FIG. 1-8 (F)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern for progressing from reach performance B to reach performance E may also be provided in which a reach performance E development notification performance and a reach performance E are executed before a variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance B. In this way, when providing a case in which a reach performance E development notification performance and a reach performance E are executed before a variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance B, a reach performance E development suggestion performance may be executed while the reach performance B is being executed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-31 to 11-34, while reach effects A to F are being executed, chance up effects can be executed, and the probability of winning varies depending on which effect pattern the chance up effect is executed in.

In particular, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, in which reach performance F is executed after reach performance A, during the execution of reach performance A, it is possible to execute a total of two performances constituting the chance-up performance, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, whereas during the execution of reach performance F, it is possible to execute a total of three performances constituting the chance-up performance, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the image display of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image. For this reason, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, the number of times the performances constituting the chance-up performance are executed is increased during the execution of reach performance F compared to during the execution of reach performance A, which makes it possible to appropriately draw the player's attention to the performance result of reach performance F.

Furthermore, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, in which reach performance E is executed after the execution of reach performance B, during the execution of reach performance B, it is possible to execute a total of three performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, whereas during the execution of reach performance E, it is possible to execute a total of two performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, as a chance-up performance. For this reason, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, the number of times the performances constituting the chance-up performance are executed during the execution of reach performance E is less than during the execution of reach performance B, which prevents the player from paying excessive attention to the performance result of reach performance E, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 029SG, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, which executes reach performance E after the execution of reach performance B, during the execution of reach performance B, it is possible to execute a total of three performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, whereas during the execution of reach performance E, it is possible to execute a total of two performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, as the chance-up performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, which executes reach performance E after the execution of reach performance B, it is also possible to execute the same number of performances constituting the chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance B as during the execution of reach performance E.

In this characteristic section 029SG, examples of the effects constituting the chance-up effect include the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of an image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image, but the present invention is not limited to these. For example, the effects constituting the chance-up effect may include the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 in a specific pattern, the output of a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the illumination of the light guide plate, the display of a light guide plate (pseudo light guide plate) on the image display device 5, the operation of the image display device 5 itself, etc.

In addition, in this characteristic section 029SG, examples of the effects that make up the chance-up effect include the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompt image, all of which are effects that are executed regardless of the player's operation (active effects). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects that make up the chance-up effect may include effects that are executed only when the player operates an operation means such as the push button 31B or stick controller 31A to change the light color of the game effect lamp 9 (the so-called back button) (active effects) that are executed only when the player operates the operation means.

As shown in Fig. 11-7 to Fig. 11-9 and Fig. 11-30, for the variable display of the variation patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ, the reach performance of the Super Reach to be executed can be determined from reach performance C and reach performance D, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than reach performance C. If the pre-performance and the premonition performance are executed and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed before the variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the reach performance I is executed, and if the reach performance G development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the reach performance G, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance I, is executed.

Furthermore, before the variable display result is announced as the result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the pre-performance and premonition performances are executed, and when the reach performance H development announcement performance is executed, the reach performance H, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance I, is executed, so that the performances can be diversified by combining the types of reach performances and the development announcement performances.

In particular, for the variable display of the variation patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ, by determining whether to execute reach performance C or reach performance D at the ratios shown in Figures 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B), the ratio of the reach performance I (high expectation reach performance development notification performance) being executed after the premonition performance is executed is set higher when the execution of reach performance C is decided than when the execution of reach performance D is decided, so that a predetermined relationship can be established between the executed reach performance and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, thereby increasing the interest in the reach performance and the development notification performance.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, an example has been given of a form in which the reach performance to be executed can be determined from reach performance C and reach performance D in the variable display of the variable patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable pattern in which reach performance C is executed during the variable display and a variable pattern in which reach performance D is executed during the variable display may be provided separately.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-34, whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined at different rates depending on the variable display result. In other words, the example shows a form in which the chance-up effect is executed as an effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot as the effect result of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The chance-up effect that can be executed during the effect period of reach effect A to reach effect D may be executed as an effect that suggests that any of reach effect E to reach effect I will be executed (developing into any of reach effect E to reach effect I).

Furthermore, as a chance-up effect, in addition to the variable display result being a jackpot and one of reach effects E to I being executed, it may also be possible to indicate that the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the variable display result is a jackpot will be 10 rounds, that the game will be controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the case where a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed after a reach performance C or a reach performance D is executed, and in the case where a reach performance H development notification performance is executed after a reach performance C or a reach performance D is executed, a common pre-performance can be executed in the period between the reach performance C or the reach performance D and the development notification performance. By executing the pre-performance, the player's attention to the development notification performance can be increased, while the player's attention can be drawn to whether the high expectation reach performance development notification performance or the reach performance H development notification performance will be executed as the development notification performance, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9 and Figures 11-27 to 11-28, during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D, it is possible to execute a branch destination suggestion effect that suggests whether a reach performance H development announcement effect or a high expectation reach performance development announcement effect will be executed after the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D, and that can suggest the execution of both a reach performance H development announcement effect and a high expectation reach performance development announcement effect. Therefore, by executing the development destination suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the development announcement effect, while also drawing the player's attention to whether a reach performance H development announcement effect or a high expectation reach performance development announcement effect will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, an example has been given of a form in which it is possible to suggest that a reach performance H development notification performance will be executed and that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed as a development suggestion performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to suggest that a reach performance G development notification performance will be executed as a development suggestion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, an example is given of a form in which a development suggestion effect can be executed by a variable display of a variable pattern that executes reach effect C or reach effect C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a development suggestion effect can also be executed by a variable display of a variable pattern that executes reach effect A or a variable display of a variable pattern that executes reach effect B.

As shown in FIG. 11-30(D), for the variation pattern of Super Reach κ in which a high expectation reach performance development notification effect and a reach performance I are executed before the performance result is notified as a reach performance C or a reach performance D, and the variation pattern of Super Reach θ in which a reach performance G development notification effect and a reach performance G are executed after the performance result is notified as a reach performance C or a reach performance D, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the variable display of the Super Reach κ variation pattern is 6. 0%, whereas the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed is 40%, so depending on whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, it becomes possible to guess whether reach performance I is executed in the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach κ, or whether reach performance H is executed in the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach θ, and therefore it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 029SG, for the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern is set to be smaller than the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a miss, the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern may be set to be smaller than the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, the characteristic part 029SG exemplifies a form in which a first pending memory display area 029SG005D and a second pending memory display area 029SG005U are provided at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, which are capable of displaying a pending memory display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 029SG-1, as shown in FIG. 11-57, an active display area 029SG005F may be provided at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, the center of the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5) in which a pending memory display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed can be displayed as an active display.

In addition, when the active display can be displayed in this manner, multiple display modes of the active display can be provided, as in the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, and an active display performance can be executed in which the probability of winning varies depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in. For example, three types of display modes for the active display can be provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and the highest probability of winning can be set when the active display is displayed in a red circle display mode, and the lowest probability of winning can be set when the active display is displayed in a white circle display mode (expected probability of winning for display modes of the active display: red > blue > white).

Furthermore, the display mode of the active display may be changed from a white or blue circle to a red circle during variable display, and the change in the display mode of the active display to a red circle may indicate an increase in the likelihood of a jackpot for the variable display being executed.

In this way, when the display mode of the active display can be changed during the variable display, as shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and 11-58 (B), for the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ, in which the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance B and then reach performance E is executed, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance E is set to P1.

In addition, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, in which a high expectation reach development notification display is executed during the execution of reach performance A and then reach performance F is executed, the rate at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance A is P2, and the rate at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance F is P3.

In this case, P3, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach performance F is being executed, may be set higher than P1, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach performance E is being executed, or P2, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach performance A is being executed.

In this way, when a variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach η (when reach performance A is executed and then reach performance F is executed), the display mode of the active display changes to a red circle before the start of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, reducing the risk of the player realizing in advance that reach performance F will be executed. Also, when reach performance E is executed and when reach performance F is executed, the display mode of the active display changes to a red circle at a higher rate in reach performance F, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than reach performance E, so that the display mode of the active display can be changed to a red circle appropriately according to the expectation of a jackpot, improving interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-1, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach η, the rate P3 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach performance F is higher than the rate P2 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach performance A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modified example 029SG-2, in the same manner as the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-1, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach η, during the execution of the reach performance F, The rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle may be set higher than the rate P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance A, and the rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance E in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ζ may be set higher than the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance B.

In this way, by providing multiple active display modes and varying the likelihood of a jackpot depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in, it is possible to make the player more aware of the likelihood of a jackpot, and by changing the display mode of the active display to a red circle before the reach effect E development notification effect or the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, it is possible to reduce the risk of a decrease in interest in the game due to the player perceiving in advance that the likelihood of a jackpot is high.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, a variation pattern of the super reach λ is provided in which a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed and reach performance I is executed without going through reach performances such as reach performance A and reach performance B. As a modified example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach λ, the rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach performance I may be set higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach performance I. In this way, by changing the display mode of the active display from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the execution of reach performance I, it is possible to make the player more aware in advance that reach performance I will be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the Super Reach λ variation pattern, the rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of the Reach performance I is set to be higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the Reach performance I is set to be higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the Reach performance I is set to be lower than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the Reach performance I. By doing so, it is possible to create a situation in which the Reach performance I is executed without going through another Reach performance even though the display mode of the active display has not changed to a red circle, which gives the game an element of surprise and increases the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG and the modified examples 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, three types of display modes for the reserved memory display and active display are provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and the expected probability of a jackpot is varied depending on which display mode the reserved memory display and active display are displayed in. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of display modes for the reserved memory display and active display may be only two types or four or more types.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modified examples 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, examples have been given in which the display mode of the active display can be changed while a reach performance is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of the change in the active display mode may include timing other than while a reach performance is being executed, for example, while a development suggestion performance or development notification performance is being executed, or the start timing of the variable display. Furthermore, if it is possible to execute a pseudo consecutive performance that includes a temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern during the variable display, the display mode of the active display may be changed at the timing of the temporary stop or re-variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, three types of display forms for the reserved memory display are provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle. An example is given of a form in which the expected probability of a jackpot varies depending on which display form the reserved memory display is displayed in. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-4, in addition to a circle, a triangle, a square, a star, etc. may be provided as the display form for the reserved memory table display, and it may be possible to suggest which of the reach effects E, F, G, H, or I the reserved memory display will develop into depending on which shape it is displayed in. In this case, when the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value judgment process and judges that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation category) is a super reach, it further judges which of the Super Reach α to Super Reach λ the Super Reach fluctuation pattern is (which of Reach performance A to Reach performance I will execute during the variable display), and transmits a Super Reach fluctuation category command (a fluctuation category command including information on which Super Reach fluctuation pattern will be executed) according to the judgment to the performance control board 12. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 can determine the display mode of the reserved memory table display from a circle, triangle, square, star, etc. based on the Super Reach fluctuation category command received from the CPU 103. Also, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the shape of the reserved memory display before the variable display begins, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-4, an example is given in which the shape of the reserved memory display can suggest a reach performance that will develop, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color of the reserved memory display can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, and the shape of the reserved memory display can further suggest a reach performance that will develop into a draw. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color and shape of the reserved memory display, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-4, an example is given of a form in which the shape of the pending memory display can suggest a future reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach performances that can suggest a future reach performance based on the shape of the pending memory display may be only some of reach performance E, reach performance F, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I (for example, only reach performance E and reach performance I).

In addition, in the characteristic section 029SG, as a chance-up effect, the characters of the reach title image can be displayed in red at the start of the reach effects A to F, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 029SG-5, as a chance-up effect, the characters of the reach title image displayed in black can be changed to red halfway through. In particular, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red halfway through as a chance-up effect in this way, the display mode of the expectation image showing the expectation of a big win displayed together with the reach title image can be changed (for example, the number of stars displayed as the expectation image can be increased). In this way, the display mode of the expectation image changes as the color of the characters of the reach title image changes from black to red, so that attention to the expectation image can be increased, and the player can be made to accurately recognize the expectation of the reach effect to be executed.

In addition, in the feature part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach κ, an example is given in which the presence or absence of a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined at the same rate when the reach presentation of the super reach to be executed is reach presentation C and when it is reach presentation D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach κ, the presence or absence of a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined at different rates when the reach presentation of the super reach to be executed is reach presentation C and when it is reach presentation D.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-59 as modified example 029SG-6, in the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach κ in which a high expectation reach performance is executed before the variable display result is announced as reach performance C or reach performance D during execution of the reach performance C or reach performance D, if the reach performance to be executed is determined to be reach performance C, a decision is made to not execute the branch destination suggestion performance 15% of the time, to execute the branch destination suggestion performance using pattern X 30% of the time, to execute the branch destination suggestion performance using pattern Y 20% of the time, and to execute the branch destination suggestion performance using pattern Z 35% of the time. Also, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be reach effect D, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect pattern X is determined to be executed 30% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Y is determined to be executed 20% of the time, and the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Z is determined to be executed 40% of the time.

In particular, in this modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate of the branch destination suggestion performance is set higher (the decision rate of not executing the branch destination suggestion performance is set lower) than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to appropriately suggest that a development notification performance such as a reach performance H development notification performance or a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed while the variable display is being executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate of the branch destination suggestion performance is set higher than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate of the branch destination suggestion performance may be set lower than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate for branch destination suggestion performance pattern Z (a performance pattern suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification performance) is set higher than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to more appropriately suggest the execution of development notification performances such as the reach performance H development notification performance and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance during the execution of the variable display, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in variant example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate for pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is set higher than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate for pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance may be set lower than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, as shown in FIG. 11-59, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ, an example is given in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect at different rates when the reach presentation of the executed super reach is reach presentation C and reach presentation D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect at different rates when the reach presentation of the executed super reach is reach presentation C and reach presentation D for the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ and super reach ι.

Moreover, in this modified example 029SG-6, a form is exemplified in which a branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance C (first advantageous outcome suggestion effect in invention 033SG) and a branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance D (second advantageous outcome suggestion effect in invention 033SG) can be executed as effects of the same presentation type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance C and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance D can be executed as effects of different presentation types.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in Figs. 11-5 to 11-9, as the reach performance of the super reach, reach performance A to reach performance D are executed, and as for the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of the reach performances E to I, a notification mode (first notification mode) in which one of these reach performances A to D is executed and the variable display result is notified is illustrated as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-7, as for the notification mode in which the reach performance of the super reach is executed, reach performance A to reach performance D is executed, and as for the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of the reach performances E to I, in addition to the first notification mode, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) in which the variable display result is notified as a miss as a result of the performance of the reach performance A to reach performance D and then the variable display result is notified as a jackpot may be provided.

In this way, when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and a first notification mode and a second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, the percentage of the branch destination suggestion performance being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode may be the same as the percentage of the branch destination suggestion performance being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode.

In this way, reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and by providing a second notification mode as a notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, it is possible to give a sense of surprise to the player by notifying the player that the variable display result is a jackpot even though the variable display result was initially notified as a miss. Furthermore, since the process of deciding to execute the branch destination suggestion performance can be made common between the case in which the performance result (variable display result) of executing reach performance C and reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode and the case in which it is notified in the second notification mode, the amount of data required for this process can be reduced.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-7, when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the first and second notification modes are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, an example is given in which the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and a first notification mode and a second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, the percentage of the branch destination suggestion effect being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode may be different from the percentage of the branch destination suggestion effect being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode.

In addition, in the modified example 029SG-7, as for the notification mode in which reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, a first notification mode in which any of these reach performances A to D are executed and the variable display result is notified, and a second notification mode in which the variable display result is notified as a miss as the performance result of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then the variable display result is notified as a jackpot again is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as modified example 029SG-8, reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, and after it is notified that the variable display result of the reach performance C or reach performance D is a miss, the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, and it is notified that the variable display result of the reach performance G is a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot (PB1-7)), the rate at which the chance up performance is executed during the variable display in the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot may be different from the rate at which the chance up performance is executed in the variable display where the performance result (variable display result) of the reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode. In this way, when the reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, the execution rate of the chance up performance can be made different depending on whether or not the reach performance G is executed before it is notified that the variable display result is a jackpot, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the percentage at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is different from the percentage at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the percentage at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ jackpot may be the same as the percentage at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-27, a branch destination suggestion effect can be executed in a plurality of presentation patterns, and a form is exemplified in which the rate at which a high expectation reach presentation development notification effect is executed varies depending on which presentation pattern is used to execute the branch destination suggestion effect. In particular, in the characteristic part 029SG, a form in which a branch destination suggestion effect is executed in presentation pattern Z is exemplified as a form in which a high expectation reach presentation development notification effect is executed with the highest rate, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a branch destination suggestion effect is executed in presentation pattern Z, a high expectation reach presentation development notification effect may be executed with an extremely high rate (for example, 99%).

In particular, in the case where the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed with an extremely high probability when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in performance pattern Z, a case where the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is not executed even though the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in performance pattern Z, or a case where a reach performance I is executed even though a high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is not executed (a so-called performance contradiction pattern) may be provided. Note that, when such a performance contradiction pattern is provided, a sense of surprise can be given to the player by executing the branch destination suggestion performance or the reach performance I in the performance contradiction pattern only when the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot, and the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z or when the reach performance I is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, in which the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, and then the reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G are executed, the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D are different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D may be the same. By doing so, in both cases where reach performance C is executed and where reach performance D is executed, the player can expect that the reach performance development notification performance will be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, an embodiment in which the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D are the same is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in both cases in which reach performance C is executed and in which reach performance D is executed, as long as it is possible to achieve an effect in which the player can expect that the reach performance development notification performance will be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D may differ by a small difference (for example, the difference between the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D is about 1% to 5%, i.e., the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D are approximately the same).

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ in which the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and then the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance C is decided is smaller than the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance D is decided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance C is decided and the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance D is decided may be the same. In this way, in both the case where the reach performance C is executed and the case where the reach performance is executed, when the reach performance G development notification performance is executed, the player can expect that the variable display result will be a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance G, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance C is decided and the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance D is decided are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as it is possible to achieve an effect that the player can expect that the variable display result will be a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance G when the reach performance G development notification performance is executed, the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance C and the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance D may differ by a small difference (for example, the difference between the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance C and the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance C and the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance D are approximately the same) in both the cases where the reach performance C and the reach performance are executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-34, in the characteristic part 029SG, it is possible to execute the following effects that constitute the chance-up effect: a red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of a cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of an image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image. An example has been given of a form in which the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 can be executed as a common effect in reach effects A to D that are executed before a reach effect E development announcement effect or a high expectation reach effect development announcement effect, and in reach effects E and reach effects F that are executed before a reach effect E development announcement effect or a high expectation reach effect development announcement effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-12, the expectation of a jackpot may be made to differ depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed in any of reach effects A to F. This makes it possible to limit the increase in the number of effects that can be executed as chance-up effects (the number of effect patterns for chance-up effects), while drawing the player's attention to which reach effect the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are being executed during, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-34, the feature section 029SG has been exemplified as a form in which the presence or absence of a chance up effect and the presentation pattern of the chance up effect can be determined at different rates depending on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence or absence of a chance up effect and the presentation pattern of the chance up effect can be determined at different rates depending on whether any of reach effects E to I is executed.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as modified example 029SG-13, for the Super Reach κ variation pattern in which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are executed before the variable display result (miss) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, it may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the chance up performance at different rates when the execution of reach performance C is decided and when the execution of reach performance D is decided. In particular, in the variable display of the Super Reach κ variation pattern, when the execution of reach performance D is decided, the execution of the chance up performance is decided at a higher rate than when the execution of reach performance C is decided, so that when the execution of reach performance D is decided, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, which can increase the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-7, a form was exemplified in which a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) is provided in which the variable display result is once notified that it is a miss as a result of the reach effects A to D, and then the variable display result is once notified that it is a jackpot. However, as the second notification mode, as shown in FIG. 11-61(A) as modified example 029SG-14, a revival mode may be executed in which the variable display result is once notified that it is a miss and then notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot between the timing when the variable display stops.

In particular, in the case where the revival performance is executed after the variable display result of the reach performance A to the reach performance D is notified that the variable display result is a miss (when the variable display is executed in any one of the variable patterns of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, and Super Reach γ to result in a jackpot), as shown in Figures 11-61 (A) to 11-61 (C), the length L21 of the performance period of the revival performance is set to the start time of the reach performance E development suggestion performance when the variable display result of the reach performance B is notified that the variable display result is a miss and then the reach performance E development notification performance, the reach performance E, and the reach performance E are executed (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of Super Reach ζ). By setting it shorter than the length of the period L22 from the start of the reaching performance E to the end of the reaching performance E (the timing of the variable display result notification), or the length of the period L23 from the start of the reaching performance G development suggestion effect to the end of the reaching performance G (the timing of the variable display result notification) when the reaching performance G development suggestion effect, the reaching performance G development notification effect, or the reaching performance G is executed after the variable display result of the reaching performance C or the reaching performance D is notified that it is a miss (when the variable display is executed with the variable display pattern of the super reach θ), it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the performance becoming redundant (L22>L21, L23>21).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-61(A) to 11-61(C), by setting the length L21 of the presentation period of the revival presentation to be shorter than the length L32 of the period from the start timing of the reach presentation E development suggestion presentation to the end timing of the reach presentation E development notification presentation, or the length L33 of the period from the start timing of the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation to the end timing of the reach presentation G development notification presentation, it is possible to add a sense of surprise to the announcement that the variable display result is a miss.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-14, a form in which the variable display result is once notified that it is a miss as a result of the performance of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then a revival performance is executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a revival performance may also be executed when a high expectation reach performance development notification performance or reach performance F is executed during the execution of reach performance A (when a variable display is executed in the variable pattern of super reach η and a jackpot is obtained), when a pre-performance, a precursor performance, a reach performance H development notification performance, or a reach performance H is executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D (when a variable display is executed in the variable pattern of super reach ι and a jackpot is obtained), or when a pre-performance, a precursor performance, a high expectation reach performance development notification performance, or a reach performance I is executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D (when a variable display is executed in the variable pattern of super reach κ and a jackpot is obtained).

As shown in the characteristic part 029SG, the probability of a jackpot being obtained when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed (expected jackpot) is set lower than the probability of a jackpot being obtained when reach performance F, reach performance G, and reach performance I are executed (expected jackpot). Therefore, in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, the probability of a revival performance being executed after the variable display result of reach performance A to reach performance D is notified that the variable display result is a miss can be set higher than the probability of a jackpot being obtained when reach performance F, reach performance G, and reach performance I are executed, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the revival performance being executed even when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed and the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

In addition, in the case where the variable display result of the reach performance B is once notified that it is a miss as a performance result of the reach performance B, and then the reach performance E development suggestion performance, the reach performance E development notification performance, and the reach performance E are executed to result in a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ to result in a jackpot), or when the variable display result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is once notified that it is a miss as a performance result, then the reach performance G development suggestion performance, the reach performance G development notification performance, and the reach performance G are executed to result in a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of the super reach θ to result in a jackpot), a revival performance may be executed, but in these cases of the super reach ζ and the super reach When the variable display is executed in the θ variation pattern, it is notified once before the revival performance that the variable display result will be a miss. Therefore, in order to prevent the presentation from becoming redundant and reducing interest in the game due to the variable display result of the reach performance being notified twice or more, the revival performance may not be executed when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach ζ or Super Reach θ variation pattern and a jackpot is reached, or the revival performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach α to Super Reach γ, Super Reach η, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ variation pattern and a jackpot is reached.

In addition, in the characteristic section 029SG, an example was given of a form in which the time-saving state can be controlled after the end of a jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving state can also be controlled when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number (e.g., 900 times), or when the variable display result is a miss, the time-saving state can also be controlled when a partial miss is derived and displayed.

In particular, in the case of controlling the time-shortened state in response to the number of times the variable display is executed reaching a specific number, or in the case of controlling the time-shortened state in response to the derivation display of some losses, a high-expectation reach performance development notification effect shown in the characteristic part 029SG or a notification effect that notifies the player that the time-shortened state will be controlled after the revival effect shown in the modified example 029SG-14 is executed may be executed. In this way, in the case of controlling the time-shortened state in response to the number of times the variable display is executed reaching a specific number, or in the case of controlling the time-shortened state in response to the derivation display of some losses, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the time-shortened state will be controlled by executing a high-expectation reach performance development notification effect or a revival effect, whether a notification that the variable display result is a jackpot will be announced, or whether a high-expectation reach performance such as reach performance I will be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, as characteristic part 029SG, a form in which both invention 029SG and invention 033SG are implemented is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of invention 029SG and invention 033SG may be implemented.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, an example of the present invention being applied to a pachinko gaming machine 1 is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
a suggestion performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a special suggestion performance (for example, reach performance I) and a first suggestion performance (for example, reach performance A), a second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), a third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and a fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance E) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion performance;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach η, a portion where a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance is executed from the execution of a reach performance A), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after it is announced that the second suggestive performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state as a performance result (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ζ, a portion where a reach performance E development announcement performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is once announced as a performance result of a reach performance B);
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect A, and then the reach effect F is executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach effect B, and then the reach effect E development notification effect is executed, and the reach effect E is further executed).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance).
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state is shorter than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance F are set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result)).
moreover,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to a player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-28, Fig. 15-29(A) to Fig. 15-32(H), Fig. 15-49(A) to Fig. 15-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash effect to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash effect to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash effect, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash effect).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in Figure 15-28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to an excessively long period until it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and in the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to preferably draw the player's attention to the special suggestion effect before it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving interest in the game. Furthermore, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and since the specific light emitting effect can be made more prominent by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period of the specific light emitting effect, it becomes even easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect.

In other words, it is possible to prevent the period until control to an advantageous state is notified from being excessively long, and the length of the presentation period and the period from when the development presentation is executed until control to an advantageous state is notified vary depending on the type of development presentation, and the development presentation and the notification of control to an advantageous state are executed in a presentation period of appropriate length depending on the type of development presentation, which increases interest in playing and makes it easy for players to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting presentation due to the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means.In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest in playing when installed in an amusement facility and has presentations that are easy for players to understand and attract their interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine that can use a light-emitting means to make a specific display easier for a player to recognize and increase interest, there is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to a player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-28, Fig. 15-29(A) to Fig. 15-32(H), Fig. 15-49(A) to Fig. 15-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash effect to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash effect to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash effect, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash effect).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance). An example of this form of the gaming machine will be described below as another example.

(Other examples)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(form)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ, a specific display start presentation) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to a player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-28, Fig. 15-29(A) to Fig. 15-32(H), Fig. 15-49(A) to Fig. 15-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash effect to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash effect to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash effect, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash effect).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in Figure 15-28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
According to this feature, the light-emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the subject of the specific light-emitting effect, and during the first period of the specific light-emitting effect, not only the first light-emitting means but also the second light-emitting means are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, making the specific light-emitting effect stand out more, making it even easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the subject of the specific light-emitting effect.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The specific display performance is composed of an appearance performance section where the appearance performance of the specific display is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-15, Fig. 15-30(D) to Fig. 15-32(H), Fig. 15-49(B) to Fig. 15-50(D), a section where an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display or active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top as a result of the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific display start performance execution process), and a periodic performance section where a periodic performance is executed in which the display mode of the specific display periodically changes at a predetermined position after the appearance performance (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-15, Fig. 15-30(D) to Fig. 15-32(H), Fig. 15-49(B) to Fig. 15-50(D), a section where the reserved display or active display is displayed as a rotation animation as a result of the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific display rotation display performance execution process),
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the timing at which the periodic performance starts (for example, as shown in Figures 15-19 and 15-20, the timing at which the appearance animation of the pending display or active display is completed and the rotation animation of these pending display or active display starts).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can increase the player's attention to a particular display.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
The effect execution means is capable of starting the specific light emission effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-29(A) to FIG. 15-32(H), when executing the specific display start effect B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated as the winning flash effect from a timing before the display start of the pending display or the active display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the specific light emitting effect starts before the specific display effect starts, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made to stand out more.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect (e.g., a specific display start effect) in which the specific display appears,
The display means is capable of displaying the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display start performance A in which only an appearance animation is executed in which the pending display or the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a specific display start performance B in which an appearance animation is executed in which the pending display or the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top after the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D or the active display area 135SG005A),
The duration of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28 and FIG. 15-49 (A) to FIG. 15-50 (D), the winning flash effect is started before the end timing of the specific display start effect A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light-emitting effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can reliably recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
The effect execution means controls the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low brightness state once and then starts the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 15-28, 15-29(A), 15-29(B), 15-49(A), and 15-49(B), when it is determined to execute a flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning, a part that temporarily turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for players to recognize the start of a specific light-emitting effect.
In the present invention, the "low luminance state" includes not only a state in which light is emitted at a low luminance, but also a state in which no light is emitted.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
The effect execution means controls the display means to a low visibility state once and then starts the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-11, when executing a flash effect when winning, the brightness of a backlight or the like built into the image display device 5 is temporarily reduced to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the flash effect when winning is started).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for players to recognize the start of a specific light-emitting effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in this invention includes a state in which the visibility of the display means is reduced compared to the immediately preceding state, and also includes a state in which the visibility of the display is reduced by means other than reducing the brightness of the display means.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., a preview effect) that suggests that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state while the variable display is being executed, and is capable of executing the specific light emission effect when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is not being executed (for example, as shown in Figs. 15-29(A) to 15-48(n) and Figs. 15-49(A) to 15-68(n), a portion that can execute a flash effect at the time of winning when the preview effect is being executed and when it is not being executed).
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) is provided that can output a variable display corresponding sound (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 15-28) corresponding to the variable display, a suggestive performance corresponding sound (preview performance corresponding sound shown in FIG. 15-29(A)) corresponding to the suggestive performance, and a specific light emitting performance corresponding sound (winning flash performance corresponding sound shown in FIG. 15-29(B)) corresponding to the specific light emitting performance,
The sound output means includes:
When the specific light-emitting effect is being executed while the variable display corresponding sound is being output, the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound can be output in priority to the variable display corresponding sound being output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-29 (B), when a flash effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the variable display corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2, while the flash effect corresponding sound is output at a volume V1 (V1>V2)).
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the suggestive effect corresponding sound is being output, the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound can be output in priority to the suggestive effect corresponding sound being output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-29(B), when a winning flash effect is executed during the execution of a preview effect, the preview effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V1 (V1>V2)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if a variable display corresponding sound or a suggestion effect corresponding sound is being output, the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound becomes easier to hear, and the output of the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound makes it easier for the player to recognize that a specific light-emitting effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 7,
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound is provided,
The effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to a specific light-emitting effect from the sound output means in the specific light-emitting effect before the completion of the display of the specific display and the light emission of the light-emitting means (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-28, Fig. 15-29(A) to Fig. 15-32(H), Fig. 15-49(A) to Fig. 15-50(D), when it is determined that a flash effect is to be executed in response to a start winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning starts to blink, and the animation of the appearance of the pending display and the active display is completed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the output of a sound corresponding to a specific light-emitting effect allows the player to quickly recognize that a predetermined condition has been met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh aspects,
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound is provided,
The performance execution means, in the specific light emission performance,
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a part capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a flash effect when a prize is won from speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-12, when it is determined that a flash effect is to be executed in response to the start of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning starts blinking, and then the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emitted by the light emitting means can make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
The specific light emitting effect is an effect in which the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner that is less emphasized than the predetermined manner during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at a brightness of C1, and during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at a brightness of C2 (C1>C2)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of a specific light-emitting effect, and it is also possible to prevent the first light-emitting means from continuing to emit light in the predetermined manner during the second period from interfering with other effects and reducing interest in the game.
In addition, the "specific pattern with a low degree of emphasis" in this invention includes a slow blinking pattern with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect is executed and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the execution period of the later winning flash effect is a portion that includes a period during which the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is executed and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first light-emitting means emits light in a specific manner both before and after the start of the variable display that is the subject of the specific light-emitting performance, making it easier for the player to recognize that it is a variable display of the subject, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth or eleventh aspect,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect starts (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when winning starts, the part that causes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth aspects,
The display means displays a specific light-emitting effect corresponding image corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect in a first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light-emitting effect corresponding image in a second display mode in which the degree of emphasis is lower than that of the first display mode during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, a portion that displays an effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of early winning, and displays a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, during the first period, the display means displays the specific light-emitting performance corresponding image in a first display mode, thereby making the player aware of the start of the specific light-emitting performance, and during the second period, the display means displays the specific light-emitting performance corresponding image in a second display mode, thereby preventing the display means from continuing to display the specific light-emitting performance corresponding image in the first display mode, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect,
The display means displays the specific light-emitting effect corresponding image in a first display mode when a variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect starts (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-13, a part that displays an effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 when a variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourteenth aspects,
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect is provided;
The sound output means outputs the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound or outputs the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in a second output mode having a lower intensity than the first output mode during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by outputting the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in the first output mode, it is possible to easily allow the player to recognize that the specific light-emitting effect has started, and by not outputting the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound or outputting it in the second output mode while the specific light-emitting effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to other effects being hindered by the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fifteenth aspect,
The sound output means outputs the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect starts (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, a part that outputs the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixteenth aspects,
The first light emitting means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting performance during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-69 as modified example 135SG-1, the performance control CPU 120 stops output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, makes the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 invisible, and clears the process timer for the late winning flash performance, based on receiving a pattern determination command during the execution of the late winning flash performance. During the pattern determination period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed as the late winning flash effect, and based on the reception of the first variable display start command, the selection of the late winning flash effect process table and the resetting and starting of the late winning flash effect process timer are performed again, thereby starting the late winning flash effect (the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of a new variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the emission of light from the light-emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of aspect 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display before the display result is derived, and then the display is re-variable displayed,
The first light-emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the provisional stop when the re-variable display performance executed in the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is started (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-69 and Fig. 15-70(A) to Fig. 15-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, during the provisional stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, a portion that continues to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable display has ended, even though it is actually a temporary stop.

A gaming machine according to a nineteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighteenth aspects,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display before the display result is derived, and then the display is re-variable displayed,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 15-69 and 15-70(A) to 15-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, a portion in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at brightness C1 and cycle T2 even during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect),
Even during the provisional stop when the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is executed, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance continues (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-69 and Fig. 15-70(A) to Fig. 15-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, during the provisional stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2).
19. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 18,
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable display has ended, even though it is actually a temporary stop.

A gaming machine according to a 20th aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 16th aspects,
The first light-emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is started (for example, as shown in Figures 15-29 (A) to 15-48 (n), during the execution of the later winning flash performance, during a pattern determination period of the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance is started, a portion that continues to blink the winning flash lamp 135SG009F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the light emission continues even during the display period of the display results of the variable display in the second period, the player's anticipation of being controlled to an advantageous state can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 21 is the gaming machine according to aspect 20,
In the display means, a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display of a first performance identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) and a variable display of a second performance identification information (e.g., a small pattern) having a lower visibility than the first performance identification information,
During the result display period, the second performance identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-33(J) and the like, during the symbol determination period, the portion in which the small symbol is displayed in a state in which the variable display is stopped),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed, so that the player can recognize that it is the result display period.

A gaming machine of aspect 22 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light-emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the second period so as not to overlap with the display of the second effect identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-33(J) etc., during the execution of the winning flash effect, a silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right part of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end part of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific light-emitting effect corresponding display is overlapped with the display of the second effect identification information, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display.

A gaming machine of aspect 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 22,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of a super reach) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The first light-emitting means, when the specific light-emitting effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect, emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect until the specific light-emitting effect starts, and starts emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect when the specific effect starts (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-90 as modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of the Super Reach that is the target of the win-time flash effect, before the start of the reach effect of the Super Reach, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked with brightness C2 and cycle T2, and from the start timing of the reach effect of the Super Reach, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on with brightness C2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means changes the mode according to the specific performance and emits light in a mode according to the specific performance, thereby increasing the interest in the specific performance.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect starts (for example, a portion that displays the first display area 135SG005F in white (whiteout) as shown in Figs. 15-96(K) to 15-98(O) and Figs. 15-104(K) to 15-106(O)),
The first light-emitting means is in a low-luminance state when the display of the display means is switched to the specific performance start image, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance after being in the low-luminance state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-90, during a white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and from the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach thereafter, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at a luminance C2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying the switch to the specific performance start image in between, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emission mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine of aspect 23 or aspect 24,
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means is capable of executing, as the specific performance, a motion performance that moves the movable body at the start of the specific performance (e.g., a movable body motion performance shown in FIG. 15-90) and a motion suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the motion performance (e.g., a movable body motion suggestion performance shown in FIG. 15-90);
The first light-emitting means is in a low-luminance state when the action suggestion performance is executed, and after being in the low-luminance state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the action performance, which is a manner corresponding to the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-90, a portion in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off during the execution period of the movable body action suggestion performance, which is a white-out period, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at a luminance C2 from the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach thereafter).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes between low brightness states associated with the execution of a suggestive performance, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emission mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 26 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light-emitting effect is executed by the effect execution means, the special effect can be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-108(A) as a modified example 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a flash effect at the time of winning is not being executed, a portion capable of lighting up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect).
When the specific light-emitting effect is started during the execution of the special effect, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect in priority to the manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-108(B) as modified example 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a flash effect at the time of winning is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to light up (blink) in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission effect from starting at an inappropriate timing, such as the timing at which a special effect ends.

A gaming machine of aspect 27 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 26,
The light emission of the first light-emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance may end at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance, or at a second timing that is later than the first timing (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-119(A) and Fig. 15-119(B) as modified example 135SG-4, the timing for ending the light-emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F includes the timing for starting the movable body operation performance during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, and the timing for starting the reach performance of the super reach).
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different between when the light emission of the first light-emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance ends at the first timing and when the light emission of the first light-emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance ends at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-119(C) as modified example 135SG-4, the part where the expectation of a jackpot is different when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance from the start timing of the movable body operation performance and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance is changed from the start timing of the reach performance),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission presentation ends, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 28 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the time of the end of the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different between when the light emission ends at the first timing and when the light emission ends at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-119 as modified example 135SG-4, depending on the timing at which the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends, the effect may be during the execution of a movable body operation effect or during the execution of a super reach reach effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

A gaming machine of aspect 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 28,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a first performance (for example, a movable body operation performance shown in FIG. 15-119 as modified example 135SG-4) and a second performance different from the first performance (for example, a reach performance of a super reach shown in FIG. 15-119 as modified example 135SG-4) during the variable display,
The first light emitting means is
The light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changeable from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the first performance in association with the execution of the first performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-119(A) as modified example 135SG-4, a portion that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement performance from the start timing of the movable body movement performance),
The light emission can be changed from a state corresponding to the specific light emission performance to a state corresponding to the second performance in association with the execution of the second performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-119(B) as modified example 135SG-4, a portion that changes the light emission state of a winning flash lamp 135SG009F to a light emission state corresponding to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance),
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the first performance and when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the second performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-119(C) as modified example 135SG-4, the expectation of a jackpot is different when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance from the start timing of the movable body operation performance and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a 30th aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 28th aspects,
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32) is provided,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an action effect (e.g., a movable body action effect) that causes the movable body to move, an action suggestion effect (e.g., a movable body action suggestion effect) that suggests the execution of the action effect, and a specific effect (e.g., a reach effect for a super reach) that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The first light emitting means is
The light emission can be changed from a light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the action suggestion performance in association with the execution of the action suggestion performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, a part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action suggestion performance from the start timing of the movable body action suggestion performance),
The light emission can be changed from a light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the specific performance in association with the execution of the specific performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, a part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach),
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is changed to the mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect and when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific effect is changed (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, the expectation of a jackpot is different when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action suggestion effect from the start timing of the movable body action suggestion effect and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect is changed to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 30,
The display modes of the specific display include a normal mode (e.g., display pattern α), a special mode (e.g., display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIG. 15-120 as modified example 135SG-5), and a special mode (e.g., display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special pattern includes a first special pattern (e.g., a display pattern γ) and a second special pattern (e.g., a display pattern β) different from the first special pattern,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-17, when the reserved display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the display pattern β is displayed).
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-120 as modified example 135SG-5, a portion in which a hold display or an active display displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε can be changed to a hold display or an active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ),
The rate at which the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher when the specific display is displayed in the special mode than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-120 as modified example 135SG-5, the rate at which the winning flash effect is executed is higher when the pending display or the active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε than when the pending display or the active display is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern γ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific display is displayed in a special mode, a specific light-emitting effect is executed at a high rate, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether the special mode will change to the first special mode or the second special mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a thirty-second aspect is the gaming machine according to a thirty-first aspect,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, a white flashing mode as shown in FIG. 15-120 as modified example 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red as shown in FIG. 15-17 ),
The normal mode is a mode of a color other than the specific color and the special color (for example, white color),
The specific display of the specific color has a higher probability of changing to the special color when the specific light-emitting effect is being executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not being executed (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, when the pending display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the probability of the display pattern of the specific display changing to display pattern β or display pattern γ differs depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the difference in the form of the specific display can be easily grasped by the difference in color, and when a specific display of a specific color is displayed, the player can pay attention to whether or not a specific light-emitting effect is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to aspect 33 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31 or 32,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a change suggestion effect, which suggests that a specific display displayed in the special mode will change to the special mode, in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, a portion capable of executing the first action effect and the second action effect shown in modified example 135SG-5),
When the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode, the special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate than when the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, the second action effect is a part that acts on a specific display displayed in display pattern δ to change the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first action effect),
The rate at which the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher when the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode than when the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, when the second action effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first action effect is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the change suggestion effect will be executed in the first mode or the second mode, and by executing the specific light-emitting effect, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation that the change suggestion effect will be executed in the second mode.

A gaming machine according to a thirty-fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to a thirty-third aspect,
The special mode includes a first special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate at which the change suggests the effect changes to the special mode is low (for example, display pattern δ shown in FIG. 15-120 as modified example 135SG-5), and a second special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate at which the change suggests the effect changes to the special mode is higher than that of the first special mode (for example, display pattern ε shown in FIG. 15-120 as modified example 135SG-5),
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the specific light emission effect is executed at a higher rate than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the flash effect is executed at the time of winning at a higher rate than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and since the specific light-emitting effect is executed at a high rate when the second special mode is displayed, which has a high probability of changing into a special mode, the execution of the specific light-emitting effect can heighten the player's anticipation of the specific display being displayed in the second special mode.

A gaming machine of aspect 35 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 34,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light-emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the specific light-emitting effect so as to overlap the specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-7, a portion capable of displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, and since the specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, it is possible to provide the player with an element of surprise and increase his/her interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 36 is the gaming machine according to aspect 35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of different types of specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-7, a portion capable of displaying silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when a prize is won),
The overlapping manner with respect to the specific display differs depending on the type of the specific light-emitting performance-compatible display (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-129(L) and FIG. 15-130(N) as modified example 135SG-7, the overlapping manner between silhouette image 135SG005S and active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of silhouette image 135SG005S to be displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a plurality of specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays are displayed, and the overlapping manner with the specific display changes depending on the specific light-emitting effect corresponding display that is displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 37 is the gaming machine according to aspect 35 or 36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., a hold display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., an active display) corresponding to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means is capable of displaying the specific light-emitting effect-corresponding display so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect is started, and is capable of displaying the specific light-emitting effect-corresponding display so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-7, a portion that displays a silhouette image 135SG005S so as to overlap the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in a first pending memory display area 135SG005D before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, and displays the silhouette image 135SG005S so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in an active display area 135SG005A during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and since not only the first specific display but also the second specific display are hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, it is possible to provide the player with an even greater sense of surprise and increase his or her interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 38 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display before the display result is derived, and then the display is re-variable displayed,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display related to the re-variable display performance, and is capable of displaying a specific light-emitting performance corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the specific light-emitting performance, superimposed on the re-variable related display (for example, in the case where a pseudo consecutive performance is executed in a variable display during the execution of a winning flash performance, a portion in which a silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash performance can be displayed superimposed on a special pattern (see FIG. 15-40, etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the re-variable related display is hidden by the specific light emitting performance corresponding display, which gives the player an element of surprise and increases his/her interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 35 to 38,
The display means is capable of displaying the specific light-emitting effect corresponding display even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28 and FIG. 15-42(a) to FIG. 15-47(l), the portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even during the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a variable display that is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, and interest in the variable display that is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect can also be increased.

A gaming machine of aspect 40 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 39,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to control the performance so that the first light-emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and the light emission ends at a predetermined end timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the variable display that is the target of the win flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2 before the start of the reach performance, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing of the reach performance).
If the light emission of the first light-emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance is not terminated at the specified end timing due to the occurrence of a specified event, special end control is performed to terminate the light emission of the first light-emitting means at a specific end timing after the specified end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-22, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display to be performed due to the generation of static electricity, etc., a part that terminates the late winning flash performance including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern determination command), which is a timing after the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt when the light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission effect does not end normally.

A gaming machine according to a 41st aspect is the gaming machine according to a 40th aspect,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of a game is provided;
The game control means is capable of transmitting variable display end information notifying the end of the variable display when the variable display ends to the performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4(A), a portion in which the CPU 103 can transmit a pattern determination command specifying the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern);
The performance execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-22, the performance control CPU 120 ends the flash performance at the time of the later winning based on the reception of a pattern determination command).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the sense of discomfort felt when terminating the light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be further reduced.

A gaming machine of aspect 42 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 39 to 41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, a portion in which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the start timing of the reach performance),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot stop the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F due to the generation of static electricity or the like, the later winning flash performance including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is ended at the end timing of the variable display, which is a timing later than the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of aspect 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 42,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of a super reach) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific performance is being executed, the specific light emitting performance is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-21, when a start winning occurs at the first start port during the execution of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the part that does not determine the execution of the winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to a specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 43,
The effect execution means does not execute the specific light emitting effect when the specified condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the specified period, and is capable of executing the specific light emitting effect when the specified condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is longer than the specified period (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the previous winning, the part that does not decide to execute the flash effect at the time of the winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance from becoming difficult to understand due to the specific light-emitting performance being executed when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

A gaming machine of aspect 45 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 44,
The performance execution means includes:
A specific effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state can also be executed in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-9, a portion in which the reach effect of a super reach can be executed even in a variable display in which the variable display result is a miss).
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emitting effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of a variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the previous winning, the flash effect at the time of the winning can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a miss).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the special effects and the special light-emitting effects due to the special effects and the special light-emitting effects being executed at the same time.

A gaming machine of aspect 46 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 45,
A specific area through which the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game medium passes through (for example, a winning ball device 6A that forms a first start winning hole);
A specific light-emitting means (e.g., a starting lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific area and capable of emitting light in different light-emitting modes;
Equipped with
The display means can display the specific display in any one of a plurality of display modes having different rates of control of the specific display to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-17, a portion in which a reserved display or an active display can be displayed in any one of display patterns α to γ having different jackpot expectancies);
The specific light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in a light-emitting manner corresponding to the display manner of the specific display, regardless of whether the specific light-emitting performance is executed or not (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, when it is determined that the display is in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the start gate lamp 135SG009S is a portion that emits light in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display based on the start winning, regardless of the light-emitting manner of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinking as the winning flash performance or the game effect lamp 9, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting means provided around the specific area, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 47 is the gaming machine according to aspect 46,
The number of light emission modes that the specific light emitting means can emit is greater than the number of light emission modes that the first light emitting means can emit in the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-9, a portion in which the number of light emission modes of the start gate lamp 135SG009S in the start gate lamp light emission performance is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission variation of the specific light emitting means is increased, which can increase the interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 48 is the gaming machine of aspect 46 or aspect 47,
The light-emitting area of the first light-emitting means is larger than the light-emitting area of the specific light-emitting means (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-10, the light-emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash performance is larger than the light-emitting area in which the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting gate lamp light-emitting performance).
The period during which the specific light-emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition 1 is longer than the period during which the first light-emitting means emits light according to the specific light-emitting effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (in the case where the execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light from the occurrence of the starting winning to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, while the start opening lamp 135SG009S emits light from the occurrence of the starting winning to the end of the variable display that is the target of the hold display notice effect (the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented due to the first light-emitting means emitting light in response to a specific light-emitting effect for an excessively long period of time, while the player's anticipation of an advantageous state being achieved through the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting means can be maintained for a long period of time.

A gaming machine of aspect 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 46 to 48,
Both the first light-emitting means and the specific light-emitting means are capable of flashing (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, a portion in which a winning flash lamp 135SG009F can flash, and as shown in modified example 135SG-10, a portion in which a starting port lamp 135SG009S can flash),
The blinking cycle of the first light-emitting means is different from the blinking cycle of the specific light-emitting means (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-10, the blinking cycle of the starter lamp 135SG009S is different from the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the blinking cycles are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the first light-emitting means and the specific light-emitting means, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 turning on and off, the movement of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source of 100V AC, such as a commercial power source, can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12, via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it diagnoses abnormalities in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 12 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 13 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 13 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 13 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of jackpot judgment values so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of big hit judgment values that changes depending on each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 14, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of this invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing this invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing this invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 135SG)
Next, the characteristic part 135SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present characteristic part 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. Fig. 15-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 135SG. As shown in Fig. 15-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a starting hole lamp 135SG009S for illuminating the winning ball device 6A (first starting hole) is provided near the winning ball device 6A.

Furthermore, a stick lamp 135SG009X for illuminating the stick controller 31A is provided within the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for illuminating the push button 31B is provided within the push button 31B. These stick lamps 135SG009X and button lamps 135SG009Y, together with the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d described above, constitute the game effect lamps 9 in this feature section 135SG.

As shown in FIG. 15-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starter lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be lit (blinked) by control from the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14.

Figure 15-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 135SG constitutes the first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes the second display area 135SG005Sa including the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D capable of displaying the number of reserved first special symbols by the number of reserved circular symbols, the second reserved memory display area 135SG005U capable of displaying the number of reserved second special symbols by the number of reserved circular symbols, and the caption display area 135SG005T capable of displaying captions showing the game status, the effects being performed, etc.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 135SG005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 135SG005J, which indicates that the special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the number of reserved first special patterns and the number of reserved second special patterns.

In the center of the first display area 135SG005F, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and variable display of the decorative patterns can be performed. In addition, small patterns 135SG005M, which are smaller than the decorative patterns, are displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged vertically. In addition, the small patterns 135SG005M are not hidden during variable display, and are always displayed in the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 15-3, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A is provided at the bottom center of the first display area 135SG005F in this characteristic section 135SG for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display.

Hereafter, in this feature section 135SG, the pending display and the active display may be collectively referred to as the specific display.

Figure 15-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 135SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 15-4 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", a "jackpot", or a "minor jackpot", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 15-4 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "1" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, the judgment result of the type of jackpot (probable hit or non-probable hit), and whether it will be a small hit, as the judgment result at the time of winning. In addition, command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the fluctuation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other".

The commands shown in FIG. 15-4(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 15-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 15-5, in this feature section 135SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter other than the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. 15-10.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 15-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 135SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature section 135SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature unit 135SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature unit 135SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature unit 135SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 15-6(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 135SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature unit 135SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 15-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 135SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 135SG will be explained using FIG. 15-7(B). In this feature section 135SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). And the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" and "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature section 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of a special jackpot will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a special jackpot, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the jackpot game state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 135SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-7(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-7(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 15-8 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the normal reach variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is not executed, and a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is executed once, and a common normal reach reach performance is executed. Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is executed twice, and a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is executed three times, and a common super reach reach performance is executed. In other words, in this feature section 135SG, an example is shown in which only one type of reach performance is provided for each of the normal reach reach performance and the super reach reach performance, but this invention is not limited to this, and multiple reach performances may be provided for the normal reach reach performance and the super reach reach performance.

The variation patterns in this feature section 135SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in Figure 15-8, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach is executed in this feature part 135SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern in this feature unit 135SG includes a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo consecutive performance in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special pattern variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display. In the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special chart variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing, and therefore in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In other words, for the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects that are executed during the variable display, the higher the chance of a big win.

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 15-9 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-9, when the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo-consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 2 jackpot), or PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 3 jackpot). Also, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 2 jackpots), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 jackpots).

As shown in FIG. 15-9, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B have different determination rates for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 30%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the variable display result is a sure-variable jackpot, the variable display result is determined to be a super reach fluctuation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-sure-variable jackpot. Furthermore, when looking at the number of times the pseudo consecutive performances are performed, if the variable display result is a jackpot with a high probability of winning, it is easier for more pseudo consecutive performances to be performed during the variable display than if the variable display result is not a jackpot with a high probability of winning. For this reason, this feature unit 135SG makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the change patterns in the variable display and the number of times the pseudo consecutive performances are performed.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small win, the special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern) using the special win fluctuation pattern determination table.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature unit 135SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved variable charts stored in memory being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the time until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 135SG is provided with a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. 15-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 15-10 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 135SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 135SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 135SG151C, a game control flag setting section 135SG152, a game control timer setting section 135SG153, a game control counter setting section 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 135SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 135SG151C stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 135SG151C associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 135SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. 15-11(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 15-11(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 135SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 135SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 135SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 135SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 135SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. 15-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 135SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 135SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special chart reserved memory (for example, "4"). In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 135SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special chart reserved memory (for example, "4"). When a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a start winning port winning designation command (first start winning port winning designation command or second start winning port winning designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start winning port winning designation commands, the area for storing pattern designation commands, the area for storing variable category designation commands, the area for storing reserved memory number notification commands, the area for storing reserved display flags, and the area for storing winning flash performance target flags indicating whether or not the winning flash performance is the target of the winning flash performance described later, in association with the reserved memory number, and are divided into the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

When the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. 15-11 (C), and the contents of the copied reserved memory are themselves deleted from the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A. The contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved memory are then shifted one by one to the higher storage areas.

As described above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B, so as shown in FIG. 15-11 (C), a storage area similar to that of the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A is provided. That is, an area for storing the start port winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the reserved memory number notification command, an area for storing the reserved display flag, and an area for storing the winning flash effect target flag that indicates whether or not the winning flash effect described below is the target.

In this feature section 135SG, if a start win occurs when variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification command based on the start win are stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without passing through the start win reception command buffer 135SG194A. The reserved display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing the advance notice setting process (S161) described below.

The contents stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) during the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

The reserved display flag is a flag that indicates the display mode of the reserved display or the active display that corresponds to the variable display being executed. Details will be described later, but in this feature unit 135SG, the display mode of these reserved displays and active displays (the value of the reserved display flag) can suggest the percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 135SG executed in step S101 of Fig. 12 will be described based on Fig. 15-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the ON state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 135SGS102). The CPU 103 can specify the first reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. When the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" (step 135SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step 135SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 135SGS101b; Y), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 135SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 135SGS105 (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" (step 135SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 135SGS103 or step 135SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 (step 135SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 135SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of step 135SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 135SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 135SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the process of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116), and the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 15-13 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 in Figure 15-12 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the normal special symbol process (step S110 in Figure 12) determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" and to control the game to a jackpot game state. In addition, the variable pattern setting process (step S111 in Figure 12) determines the variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols.

On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 135SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. will execute a preview performance such as a pre-reading preview performance as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 15-13(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 15-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 15-12 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 135SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 135SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 135SGS123; N), the special chart display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 15-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS124). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted in step 135SGS109 in FIG. 15-12 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step 135SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small win determination range, that is, if it is determined that a small win will occur in the variable display (step 135SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win", is executed (step 135SGS126), a variable pattern determination table for special wins is selected and set (step 135SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS138.

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is not within the predetermined small win judgment range, that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" (step 135SGS128), is executed, and it is judged whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 135SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). The miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is a miss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

In addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, this feature unit 135SG also has miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the number of reserved memories is three, and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the number of reserved memories is four, prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 15-9, of these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, which is within the possible range of the random number value MR3 used to determine the fluctuation pattern.

For this reason, in step 135SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the determination of non-reach and super reach will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 135SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 15-13 (A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 135SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

The controller 100 also executes the setting to send the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command if it is a non-variable jackpot (step 135SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 135SGS134). If the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), the controller 100 selects and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 135SGS135), and proceeds to step 135SGS138.

Also, if the determined jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, the variable category according to the range of judgment values including the random number MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern judgment tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for the variable pattern judgment (step 135SGS138). In this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 135SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 135SGS139), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

Figure 15-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S75 of Figure 8. In the command analysis process shown in Figure 15-14, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15, for example by checking the contents stored in the performance control command receiving buffer (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If a command is received in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), it is determined whether the received command is a command to designate winning at the first starting port, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command (step 135SGS222).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is not a first start port winning designation command (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is a second start port winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

If the received command in step 135SGS224 is not a second start port winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command in step 135SGS226 is not a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command in step 135SGS227 is not a variable category command (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command in step 135SGS228 is not the first pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the command received in step 135SGS222 is a first start port winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), if the command received in step 135SGS224 is a second start port winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), if the command received in step 135SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), or if the command received in step 135SGS227 is a variable category command (step 135SGS227; Y), If the command received in step 135SGS228 is the first pending memory count notification command (135SGS228; Y), or if the command received in step 135SGS230 is the second pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is stored at the beginning of the free space in the start winning time received command buffer 135SG194A or active display buffer 135SG194B shown in FIG. 15-11 (step 135SGS233), and processing returns to step 135SGS221.

In step 135SGS233, specifically, if there is no pending memory and the variable display is not in progress, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B, and if there is pending memory or the variable display is in progress, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning time received command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, when a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), the pending memory number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. In other words, it is sufficient if the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a start winning can be stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A.

If the received command in step 135SGS230 is not the second pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and processing returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis process of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is a start port winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, or a reserved memory number notification command, the received command is stored sequentially from the beginning of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A, but this invention is not limited to this. If the received command is a start port winning designation command, a timer is set to wait for the reception of the reserved memory number notification command, and if the reserved memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry reserved memory that has not received the reserved memory number notification command may be set as not being subject to the pre-reading preview performance described below.

Next, the performance control process processing in this characteristic section 135SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 15-15, in the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) and then executes a specific display start performance execution process (step 135SGS162) to execute a specific display start performance as a display start animation for the pending display in the active display area 135SG005A, the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, and the second pending memory display area 135SG005U, and a display start animation for the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. In addition, after the specific display start performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 executes a winning flash performance execution process (step 135SGS163) for executing a winning flash performance, a specific display rotation display performance execution process (step 135SGS164) for executing a specific display rotation display performance as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the reserved display or active display after the above-mentioned specific display start performance has ended (see Figures 15-19 (B-1) to 15-19 (B-4)), and a start port lamp light emission performance execution process (step 135SG165) for executing a start port lamp light emission performance in which the start port lamp 135SG009S is illuminated in a color according to the display mode of the reserved display/active display based on the reserved memory until the variable display based on the reserved memory that is the target of the reserved display notification performance ends, when it is determined that the reserved display notification performance is to be executed as a pre-reading notice in this characteristic part 135SG, and then executes one of the processes from step S170 to step S177.

The specific display rotation display effect execution process in this characteristic section 135SG also includes a process of shifting each pending display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotation animation, and a process of shifting the pending display to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and displaying it as a rotation animation.

Figure 15-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 161 of Figure 15-15 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240) and determines whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241). If there is no entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; Y), it determines whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2", that is, whether the pending display notice performance as the pre-reading notice performance is already being executed (step 135SGS242).

If there is no entry with the display mode flag set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243). If the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small win (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is identified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a) and the variable category is identified from the variable category command of the entry (step 135SGS244b). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display preview performance and the display pattern based on the identified variable display result and variable category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-17, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 5% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 0% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), there is an 80% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 20% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 0% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, there is a 65% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 25% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 10% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 15% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 30% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 55% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In other words, this feature unit 135SG is set so that when the reserved display or active display is displayed in red, the target variable display result has the highest probability of being a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate), and when the reserved display or active display is displayed in white, the target variable display result has the highest probability of being a miss (jackpot expectation rate according to the display color of the reserved display or active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 15-16, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has decided to execute a hold display preview performance in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it has decided to execute a hold display preview performance in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246; Y), it sets the display mode flag of the entry to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the decided display pattern (step 135SGS247), and ends the advance preview setting process.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of that entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y), or if it has been decided not to execute the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS246; N), then the display mode flag of that entry is set to "0" (step 135SGS248), which corresponds to not executing the dig display preview performance, and the advance preview setting process is terminated.

Note that, in this feature section 135SG, an example is given of a form in which the preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display can be executed together as a preview effect for the pending display, but the invention is not limited to this, and the preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display can also be executed individually as different effects.

Figure 15-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS162 of Figure 15-15 as the specific display start performance execution processing. In the specific display start performance execution processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B is being executed (step 135SGS251). Whether or not either specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B is being executed can be determined by whether or not the process timer for specific display start performance A or the process timer for specific display start performance B, which will be described later, is operating.

If the specific display start performance A or the specific display start performance B is not being executed (step 135SGS251; N), it is determined whether or not a start winning designation command has been received (whether or not the start winning designation command reception flag is set) (step 135SGS252). If the start winning designation command has not been received (step 135SGS252; N), the specific display start performance execution process is terminated. Also, if the start winning designation command has been received (step 135SGS252; Y), a newly generated reserved memory entry is identified by referring to the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (263SGS273), and it is determined whether or not it is the first special chart reserved memory (step 135SGS253a). In addition, whether or not it is the first special chart reserved memory can be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (the identified entry) is not the first special chart reserved memory (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255. If the entry is the first special chart reserved memory (step 135SGS253a; Y), determine whether the display mode flag of the identified entry is 0 or not, that is, whether the entry is the target of the reserved display notice performance (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the identified entry is 0, that is, the entry is not the target of the reserved display notice performance (step 135SGS254; Y), proceed to step 135SGS255.

In the processing of step 135SGS255, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table for specific display start performance A according to the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display). Then, it starts a process timer for specific display start performance A (step 135SGS256).

If the display mode flag of the identified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is the target of the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS254; N), a process table for specific display start effect B corresponding to the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display) is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, a process timer for specific display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device according to the contents of process data 1 in the set specific display start performance process table (step 135SGS259), and ends the specific display start performance execution process.

Also, if specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B is being executed (step 135SGS251; Y), the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer for the specific display start performance being executed (process timer for specific display start performance A or process timer for specific display start performance B) by 1 (step 135SGS260), and determines whether the process timer for the specific display start performance that decremented the value by 1 (process timer for the specific display start performance being executed) has timed out (step 135SGS261). If the process timer for the specific display start performance being executed has not timed out (step 135SGS261; N), the performance device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the specific display start performance being executed (step 135SGS262), and the specific display start performance execution process is terminated.

If the process timer for the specific display start performance currently being executed times out (step 135SGS261; Y), it is determined whether or not the process timer for the specific display start performance is the last process timer for the specific display start performance (step 135SGS263). If the last process timer for the specific display start performance has timed out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start performance ends (step 135SGS267) and the specific display start performance execution process ends. If the last process timer for the specific display start performance has not timed out (step 135SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next specific display start performance is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the next specific display start performance (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and the specific display start performance execution process ends.

As described above, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning occurs and it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance (hold display preview performance) based on the start winning, or when the start winning is a start winning at the second start port, as shown in Figures 15-19 (A), 15-19 (B), and 15-19 (B-1) to 15-19 (B-4), a specific display start performance A is displayed in a position according to the number of hold memories in the active display area 135SG005A or the hold memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U, in which a hold display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the appearance animation of the pending display (active display) as the specific display start performance A is approximately 0.2 seconds. After the specific display start performance A ends, the pending display (active display) transitions to a display with a rotating animation in the active display area 135SG005A or pending memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U as with other pending displays and active displays, as the specific display rotating display performance described above.

In addition, when a start winning occurs, and the execution of a pre-reading preview performance (hold display preview performance) is determined based on the start winning, and the start winning is a start winning to the first start port, as shown in Figures 15-20 (A) to 15-20 (C) and 15-20 (C-1) to 15-20 (C-4), as a specific display start performance B, first, an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. After character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, a variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special reserved memory already exists, an animation of character A moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, character A is displayed overlapping with a part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

When character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, as shown in Figures 15-20 (C-1) to 15-20 (C-4), an animation is displayed in which character A attacks (acts) the position where the pending display is displayed based on the initial winning. When the display of this animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where character A attacked.

In this feature 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the position where the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as the specific display start performance B is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the reserved display appearance animation is about 0.2 seconds. In other words, when the specific display start performance B is executed for the reserved display in the first special chart, it takes 1.2 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning to the completion of the display of the reserved display based on the start winning. Then, the reserved display after the specific display start performance B ends transitions to a display with a rotation animation in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D as the specific display rotation display performance described above, just like other reserved displays and active displays.

When character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display start performance B, if the variable display is not being executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special chart reserved memory does not exist, an animation of character A moving to the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. Then, when character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position where the active display is displayed based on the start winning, i.e., the active display area 135SG005A, is displayed, as in Figures 15-20 (C-1) to 15-20 (C-4). When the display of this animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where character A attacked.

In this feature 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start performance B is approximately 0.5 seconds, and the period from the end of that animation to the end of the active display appearance animation is approximately 0.2 seconds. In other words, when specific display start performance B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the start winning. Then, after the specific display start performance B ends, the active display transitions to a display with a rotation animation in the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display rotation display performance described above.

Figures 15-21 and 15-22 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of Figure 15-21 as the winning flash effect execution process. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command reception buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and determines whether there are any entries in the start winning command reception buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B with the display mode flag set to "1" or "2", i.e., whether the pending display preview effect is being executed (step 135SGS273).

If there is an entry with the display mode flag set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS273; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is an entry based on a start winning at the first start gate (step 135SGS274). Whether the entry is an entry based on a start winning at the first start gate can be determined from the start gate winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on a start winning into the first start port (step 135SGS274; Y), the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the game state is normal or not (step 135SGS275). If the game state is normal (step 135SGS275; Y), it further judges whether the value of the presentation control process flag is any of 0 to 3, that is, whether the game state is a big win game state or a small win game state (step 135SGS276). If the value of the presentation control process flag is any of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), it judges whether the variable category of the entry (an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is a super reach or not (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is Super Reach (step 135SGS277; Y), it is determined whether the value of the performance control process flag is 2 or not, i.e., whether variable display is being executed or not (step 135SGS278). If the value of the performance control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a reach performance is being executed or not (step 135SGS279). Note that whether a reach performance is being executed or not can be determined from the contents of the variable display process data, etc.

If the value of the performance control process flag is not 2 (step 135 SGS278; N) or if the reach performance is not being executed (step 135 SGS279; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the flash performance when a win occurs based on the variable display result. Note that the variable display result can be determined from the design specification command of an entry for which the flash performance target flag when a win occurs is not set.

As shown in FIG. 15-24, if the variable display result is a miss, the flash effect when a prize is won is determined to be executed with a probability of 10%, and the flash effect when a prize is won is determined not to be executed with a probability of 90%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the flash effect when a prize is won is determined to be executed with a probability of 20%, and the flash effect when a prize is won is determined not to be executed with a probability of 80%.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if the winning flash effect is executed from the start of the winning, the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is set to be higher than if the winning flash effect is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 15-21, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects judges whether or not it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 135SG279b). If it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 135SG279b; Y), the CPU 120 sets the flash effect target flag for the entry (the entry for which the flash effect target flag for the prize is not set) to "1" indicating that the entry is a pending memory for the flash effect when a prize is won (step 135SG280), and turns on the flash effect execution flag for the prize (step 135SG280a). It selects a process table for the flash effect when a prize is won in the previous period, starts a process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the previous period, and controls the effect device according to the contents of process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to 135SGS283), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in Figure 15-23, the early winning flash effect is an effect in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 flash in a manner corresponding to the early winning flash effect for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the initial winning (as shown in Figures 15-26 (A) and 15-26 (B) the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly turned on and off at high brightness C1), a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and an effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. The winning flash effect corresponding sound in this characteristic part 135SG is divided into a first-term winning flash effect corresponding sound output during the execution of the first-term winning flash effect, and a second-term winning flash effect corresponding sound output during the execution of the second-term winning flash effect. Of these, the first-term winning flash effect corresponding sound may be a sound with a relatively short output period (for example, 1 second) such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character that is output once. Also, the second-term winning flash effect corresponding sound may be a sound with a longer output period than the first-term winning flash effect corresponding sound such as a dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect). In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 135SG, in addition to the winning flash effect corresponding sound described above, multiple performance sounds such as the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound described below can be simultaneously output from the speakers 8L and 8R using different channels at different volumes.

If the entry is based on a win at the second starting port (step 135SG274; N), if the game state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), if the effect control process flag is not 0 to 3 (step 135SG276; N), if the variable category of the entry is not a super reach (step 135SG277; N), if a reach effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), or if it has been decided not to execute a flash effect when a win is generated (step 135SG279b), the flash effect target flag for the entry when a win is generated is set to "0" (step 135SG279c), indicating that the entry is not eligible for the flash effect when a win is generated, and the flash effect execution process when a win is generated is terminated.

In addition, if the winning flash effect execution flag is on in step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 judges whether the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is operating (step 135SGS284). If the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is operating (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and it is judged whether the process timer for the previous winning flash effect has timed out after decrementing the value by 1 (step 135SGS286). If the process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS286; N), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the previous period that is currently running (step 135SGS287), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last winning the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS288). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last winning the previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS288; N), the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a process data switch, starts the process timer for the next process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period, and controls the effect device according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the next process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period (steps 135SGS289, 135SGS290, 135SGS291), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Then, in step 135SGS292, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) other than the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash performance. In addition, the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash performance execution process is terminated. Note that, as a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash performance, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, in accordance with the flash effect when a prize is won, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and stick lamp 135SG009Y and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be illuminated in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, if the last process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the early stage has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect when a prize is won in the early stage (step 135SGS294). Then, it selects a process table for the flash effect when a prize is won in the later stage, starts the process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the later stage, controls the effect device according to the contents of process data 1 (steps 135SGS294 to 135SGS297), and proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 15-23, the later winning flash effect is an effect in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes in a manner corresponding to the later winning flash effect from the end of the earlier winning flash effect to the start of the reach effect of the target variable display super reach, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V1, and the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A modeled by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. As a manner corresponding to the later winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red, as in the earlier winning flash effect. In addition, because the flash effect for later winning is performed at a lower brightness than the flash effect for earlier winning (see Figure 15-28), the actual light emitted by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the flash effect for later winning will be darker than the flash effect for earlier winning.

As shown in FIG. 15-27(A), except during the execution of the flash effect when the previous winning period, the game effect lamp 9 (particularly the frame lamp 9b) is configured to repeatedly turn on (blink) and off at a brightness C2 that is lower than the brightness C1 described above. In particular, the blinking cycle at brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle during the execution of the flash effect when the previous winning period, and during the blinking, as shown in FIG. 15-27(B) to FIG. 15-27(D), the frame lamp 9b blinks while changing the light color in stages at multiple points in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period except during the execution of the flash effect when the previous winning period is less impressive to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash effect when the previous winning period is.

Also, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of early prize winning is not running in step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning is running (step 135SGS284; N), the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning by 1 (step 135SGS298), and determines whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning that has been decremented by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning has not timed out (step 135SGS299; N), the performance device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning that is currently running (step 135SGS300), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the later winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the later winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). If the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the later winning has not timed out (step 135SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next flash effect at the time of the later winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (steps 135SGS302 to 135SGS304), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

Also, if the process timer for the last flash effect at the time of late winning expires (step 135SGS301; Y), the process timer for the first flash effect at the time of late winning starts, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In step 135SGS307, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the later winning flash performance. In addition, the sound corresponding to the winning flash performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309) and determines whether the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, whether the variable display being executed is a variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance (step 135SGS310). If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "0" (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash performance execution process ends. If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1" (step 135SGS310; Y), it determines whether it is the start timing of the reach performance (step 135SGS311).

If it is the timing to start the reach effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the later winning flash effect, turns off the winning flash effect execution flag (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and ends the winning flash effect execution process.

Also, if it is not the timing to start the reach effect (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol determination command has been received (step 135SGS311a). If a symbol determination command has been received (step 135SGS311a; Y), the later winning flash effect ends, the winning flash effect execution flag is turned off (steps 135SGS312, 135SGS313), and the winning flash effect execution process ends. If a symbol determination command has not been received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process ends without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in this feature section 135SG is an effect that ends when a predetermined performance period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, while the flash effect at the time of late winning is an effect that is executed repeatedly without ending every time a certain period of time has elapsed until the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display of the performance target.

In addition, if the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is unable to determine that it is time to start the reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to static electricity or the like during the execution of the later winning flash performance, it is possible to end the later winning flash performance including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern determination command), which is later than the start timing of the reach performance.

As shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 15-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. 15-22, in this feature section 135SG, the performance control CPU 120 selects one performance process table as the process table for the flash performance when an early prize is won, and selects one performance process table as the process table for the flash performance when a late prize is won. In other words, the performance patterns (performance periods) of the flash performance when an early prize is won and the flash performance when a late prize is won in this feature section 135SG are always executed in the same performance mode and for the same performance period, regardless of the number of reserved memories, etc.

Figure 15-25 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance processing (step S172) in the performance control process processing. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, variable time timer, and variable control timer by 1 (steps 135SGS351, 135SGS352, and 135SGS353). Note that the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers that are set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process (step 135SGS358). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135SGS356; N), the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 135SGS360).

In particular, the control contents of steps 135SGS359 and 135SGS360 are as follows: the performance control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 lower than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display corresponding sound in this characteristic section 135SG refers to background music corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, background music corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive performances executed during the variable display, etc. In addition, when the flash effect for winning a previous period is not being executed (step 135SGS362; N), the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (step 135SGS363), whereas when the flash effect for winning a previous period is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), the game effect lamp 9 is not controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (as shown in Figures 15-21 and 15-22, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash effect for winning a previous period).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a preview performance execution process (step 135SG364). In this preview performance execution process, for example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, it determines whether or not to execute a preview performance during variable display execution and in which performance pattern the preview performance will be executed, and it is possible to execute the preview performance according to the determination result. Also, when determining the performance pattern of the preview performance in the variable display start setting process described above, one performance pattern is determined from multiple performance patterns at different rates depending on the variable display result, so that the proportion of the preview performance controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on which performance pattern the preview performance is executed in.

The preview effect executed in this feature section 135SG is a line preview effect in which the character's lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the expected probability of a jackpot varies depending on the lines displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 also checks whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the performance control CPU 120 creates image data for the next display screen of the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative patterns) and writes it to a specified area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). In this way, variable display control of the decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data that superimposes image data of a specified area such as a set background image and image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5. In addition, a specified value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

In addition, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after executing step 135SGS366, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that a pattern confirmation command has been received is set (step 135SGS369; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control will transition to stopping the variable display. Therefore, even if, for example, a variable pattern designation command indicating a long variable time is received due to noise between boards, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern has ended).

The process table used for controlling the variable display of the decorative pattern contains the process data during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer settings of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the processing of step 135SGS356, there is no process data to switch (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the performance control of the decorative pattern based on the process table ends.

Next, the operation of each of the presentation devices when the winning flash presentation in the characteristic part 135SG is executed will be explained with reference to Figs. 15-28 to 15-68. First, Fig. 15-28 is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during execution of the variable display and a decision is made to execute a winning flash presentation based on the start winning. Fig. 15-28 is a timing chart corresponding to both the case where execution of the pending display notice presentation is decided when execution of the winning flash presentation is decided based on the start winning, and the case where it is decided not to execute the pending display notice presentation. Figs. 15-29 to 15-48 are diagrams showing the presentation modes of the image display device 5 and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F when a start winning occurs during execution of the variable display and execution of the pending display notice presentation and the winning flash presentation are decided based on the start winning. Figures 15-49 to 15-68 are diagrams showing the presentation state of the image display device 5 and winning flash lamp 135SG009F when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and a decision is made to execute a winning flash presentation based on the start winning, while a decision is made not to execute a pending display advance presentation.

Note that "when it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect and the winning flash effect" shown in Figures 15-29 to 15-48 refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern γ (displayed as a blue or red circle), and "when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect but not to execute the pending display preview effect" shown in Figures 15-49 to 15-68 refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect is displayed in display pattern α (displayed as a white circle).

First, as shown in Fig. 15-28 and Fig. 15-29(A), during variable display, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound corresponding to the variable display at a volume of V2. During variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 15-27(A) to Fig. 15-27(D)).

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if the preview performance is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance (for example, a preview performance-related sound such as a character speaking the characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2. In addition, there are three first special chart reserve memories as reserve memories (three reserve displays are displayed in the first reserve memory display area 135SG005D).

If a winning entry (start winning entry) occurs in the first starting port during such a variable display, and a decision is made to execute a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect based on the starting winning entry, the previous winning flash effect will start, as shown in Figures 15-28 and 15-29 (B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 15-28 and Fig. 15-29 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 15-28, Fig. 15-30 (C) and Fig. 15-30 (D), the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and starts blinking control at cycle T1 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

In addition, when the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 15-30 (D), 15-31 (E), and 15-31 (F), an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed as the specific display start performance B described above, along with an animation of character A moving to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D where the pending display is displayed (the position where the fourth pending display is displayed in the case of this feature part 135SG) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed at the affected position, in which the pending display that is the subject of the ongoing winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 15-20 (D-1) to 15-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display that has completed its appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like other pending displays, as a special display rotating display performance.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a start winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts flashing, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 starts before the pending display based on the start winning is completed. Note that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the later winning flash effect (see Figures 15-32 (G) and 15-32 (H)).

When the early winning flash effect ends, the late winning flash effect starts from the same timing. For the late winning flash effect, as shown in Figures 15-28, 15-32 (G) and 15-32 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash effect sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and with a period T2 (period T2 > period T1). In addition, the image display device 5 starts to display a silhouette image 135SG005S of character A at regular intervals around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

At the end of the early winning flash performance and the start of the late winning flash performance, the light emission mode (flashing at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y as part of the early winning flash performance ends. Then, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y switches to a mode (flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T0 as shown in Figures 15-27(A) to 15-27(D)) corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. In other words, the lighting state of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will return to the lighting state before the start of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning, based on the end of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will remain in the off state after the start timing of the flash performance at the time of the later winning.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 is performed in the same manner as before the flash effect at the time of the previous winning (light emission manner shown in Figure 15-29 (A)) as described above, in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

As shown in Figures 15-32 (H), 15-33 (I) and 15-33 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B superimposed on the entire first display region 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5. The silhouette image 135SG005S in this characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when superimposed on the black image 135SG005B.

In the present characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when it is displayed overlapping with the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in multiple colors, such as the aforementioned blue, green, and red, the probability of a jackpot may be made to differ depending on the color in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 15-32(H) and FIG. 15-33(J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the image display device 5. Therefore, in the winning flash performance of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlapping each other, and the player can check whether the variable display is being performed by visually checking the small pattern 135SG005M, regardless of whether the silhouette image 135SG005S is being displayed during the winning flash performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-33(J), FIG. 15-34(K) and FIG. 15-34(L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash effect at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-33(J), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

After that, as shown in Figures 15-34 (K) to 15-41 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the following is repeatedly executed: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 as a later winning flash effect; the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2; and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in Figures 15-38 (S) to 15-40 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, even during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see Figure 15-40 (W). In this feature section 135SG, decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol notifying of a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the central decorative symbol display area 5C), the later winning flash performance is executed by outputting the winning flash performance corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15-41(Y) and FIG. 15-41(Z), when the variable display that has become a normal reach miss in response to the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash performance at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is also executed during the pattern determination period of the variable display of the normal reach miss. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-41(Y) and FIG. 15-41(Z), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

As shown in Figures 15-40 (W) and 15-40 (X), during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, they emit blue light at brightness C2), and then return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image when the variable display is executed again. Furthermore, during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can recognize that the variable display has not yet ended by visually checking the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in Figures 15-42(a) and 15-42(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance starts, the pending display that corresponds to the variable display displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in Figures 15-43(c) to 15-47(l), the variable display continues to execute the flash effect at the time of the later winning. Also, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 15-43(d) and 15-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 15-45(g) to 15-46(j)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 15-46 (j)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 15-45(g) and FIG. 15-46(j), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, blue at brightness C2 for the first temporary stop, and green at brightness C2 for the second temporary stop), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Although not shown in this feature section 135SG, when three pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, during the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, red at brightness C2), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display.

As shown in FIG. 15-48(m) and FIG. 15-48(n), when the timing for the reach effect to start comes due to the progression of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white), and then the reach effect starts. Note that in this feature portion 135SG, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

At this whiteout timing, the output of the winning flash sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as a later winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end.

At the whiteout timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 ends. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period.

In other words, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off. Then, when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d start to emit light (lighting up at brightness C1) according to the reach effect described above.

During the whiteout period, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is silence. When the whiteout ends, the aforementioned winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d start to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) according to the reach performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the reach performance corresponding sound, which is a sound according to the reach performance. Note that, as the reach performance corresponding sound in this characteristic part 135SG, background music or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the reach performance (the reach performance of the super reach) is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 15-28, if a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display and it is decided to execute the hold display preview performance based on the start winning, the start gate lamp 135SG009S will start illuminating in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the hold display preview performance (for example, blue if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern β, and red if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern γ) from the timing of the start winning as a start gate lamp illumination performance.

The illumination of the start gate lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the winning flash effect described above, and regardless of the blinking state of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, it continues to emit light in a color that corresponds to the display pattern of the hold display notice effect from the time of the aforementioned start winning until the end of the target variable display of the start gate lamp illumination effect (target variable display of the winning flash effect).

Next, we will explain the cases where the execution of the pending display preview effect along with the winning flash effect is not decided upon starting winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in Fig. 15-28 and Fig. 15-49 (A), while the variable display is being performed, the image display device 5 performs variable display of decorative symbols, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the variable display at a volume of V2. Also, while the variable display is being performed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 15-27 (A) to Fig. 15-27 (D)).

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if the preview performance is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance (preview performance corresponding sound) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2. In addition, there are three first special chart reserved memories as reserved memories (three reserved displays are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

If a winning entry (start winning entry) occurs in the first starting port during such a variable display, and a decision is made to execute a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect based on the starting winning entry, the previous winning flash effect will start, as shown in Figures 15-28 and 15-49 (B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 15-28 and Fig. 15-49 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 15-28, Fig. 15-50 (C) and Fig. 15-50 (D), the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and starts blinking control at cycle T1 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG00X, and button lamp 135SG009Y. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

In addition, when the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 15-49 (B), 15-50 (C), and 15-50 (D), the reserved display that is the subject of the currently running winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from the bottom to the top as the aforementioned specific display start performance A, as shown in Figures 15-19 (B-1) to 15-19 (B-4)). Note that the reserved display that has completed the appearance animation in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like the other reserved displays as a specific display rotating display performance.

In particular, when the special display start performance A is executed together with the winning flash performance, the pending display appearance animation ends while the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned special display start performance B is executed together with the winning flash performance, the pending display appearance animation ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E has finished on the image display device 5 (see Figures 15-29 to 15-32). In other words, when the special display start performance A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed and the rotation animation is started at an earlier timing than when the special display start performance B is executed.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a start winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will start flashing, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 will start before the pending display based on the start winning is completed. Note that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in this feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the previous winning flash effect.

When the early winning flash effect ends, the late winning flash effect starts from the same timing. For the late winning flash effect, as shown in Figures 15-28, 15-52 (G) and 15-52 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash effect sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and with a period T2 (period T2 > period T1). In addition, the image display device 5 starts to display a silhouette image 135SG005S of character A at regular intervals around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

At the end of the early winning flash performance and the start of the late winning flash performance, the light emission mode (flashing at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y as part of the early winning flash performance ends. Then, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y switches to a mode (flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T0 as shown in Figures 15-27(A) to 15-27(D)) corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. In other words, the lighting state of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will return to the lighting state before the start of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning, based on the end of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will remain in the off state after the start timing of the flash performance at the time of the later winning.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 is performed in the same manner as before the flash effect at the time of the previous winning (light emission manner shown in Figure 15-29 (A)) as described above, in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figures 15-52 (H), 15-53 (I) and 15-53 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where a transparent black image 135SG005B is superimposed over the entire first display region 135SG005F of the image display device 5, excluding the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 15-52(H) and FIG. 15-53(J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the image display device 5. Therefore, in the winning flash performance of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlapping each other, and the player can check whether the variable display is being performed by visually checking the small pattern 135SG005M, regardless of whether the silhouette image 135SG005S is being displayed during the winning flash performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-53(J), FIG. 15-54(K) and FIG. 15-54(L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash effect at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-53(J), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

After that, as shown in Figures 15-54 (K) to 15-61 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the following is repeatedly executed: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 as a later winning flash effect; the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2; and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in Figures 15-58 (S) to 15-60 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, even during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see Figure 15-60 (W). In this feature section 135SG, decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol notifying of a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the central decorative symbol display area 5C), the later winning flash performance is executed by outputting the winning flash performance corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a cycle of T2, and displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15-61(Y) and FIG. 15-51(Z), when the variable display that has become a normal reach miss in response to the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash performance at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is also executed during the pattern determination period of the variable display of the normal reach miss. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-61(Y) and FIG. 15-61(Z), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

As shown in Figures 15-60 (W) and 15-60 (X), during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, the light emission mode corresponds to the background image when the variable display is executed again). Furthermore, during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can recognize that the variable display has not ended yet by visually checking the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in Figures 15-62(a) and 15-62(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance starts, the pending display that corresponds to the variable display displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in Figure 15-63(c) to Figure 15-67(l), the variable display continues to execute the flash effect at the time of the later winning. Also, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figure 15-63(d) and Figure 15-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figure 15-65(g) to Figure 15-66(j)).

As shown in FIG. 15-65(g) and FIG. 15-66(j), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, blue at brightness C2 for the first temporary stop, and green at brightness C2 for the second temporary stop), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Although not shown in this feature section 135SG, when three pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, during the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, red at brightness C2), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 15-66 (j)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 15-68(m) and FIG. 15-68(n), when the timing for the reach effect to start comes due to the progression of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white), and then the reach effect starts. Note that in this feature portion 135SG, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

At this whiteout timing, the output of the winning flash sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as the later winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end.

At the whiteout timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 ends. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period, but once the whiteout ends, they emit light in a manner that corresponds to the reach presentation.

During the whiteout period, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is silence. When the whiteout ends, the aforementioned winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d start to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) according to the reach performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the reach performance corresponding sound, which is a sound according to the reach performance. Note that, as the reach performance corresponding sound in this characteristic part 135SG, background music or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the reach performance (the reach performance of the super reach) is being executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in Figures 15-28, 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up before the pending display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash performance. Furthermore, the invention has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light-emitting means in this invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light-emitting means in this invention. As shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flashes at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance, while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at a brightness of C3 and a cycle of T4 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance. During the execution of the early winning flash effect, it flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1, and during the execution of the later winning flash effect, it flashes at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T0. Therefore, during the execution of the early winning flash effect, not only the winning flash lamp 135SG009F but also the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1, making the winning flash effect stand out more, and making it even easier for players to recognize the reserved display, which is the target of the winning flash effect.

...

As shown in Figure 15-15, Figure 15-30 (D) to Figure 15-32 (H), Figure 15-49 (B) to Figure 15-50 (D), the specific display start performance is composed of a part where an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a part where the pending display is displayed as a rotation animation as shown in Figure 15-15, Figure 15-30 (D) to Figure 15-32 (H), Figure 15-49 (B) to Figure 15-50 (D), and as shown in Figure 15-19 and Figure 15-20, the rotation animation of the pending display starts from the timing when the appearance animation of the pending display is completed, so the player's attention to the pending display can be increased.

Also, as shown in Figures 15-29(A) to 15-32(H), when performing special display start performance B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d light up as a winning flash performance from a timing before the reserved display starts, so the winning flash performance can be made to stand out more. Note that, in this feature section 135SG, even when performing special display start performance A of Figures 15-49(A) to 15-50(D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d light up as a winning flash performance from a timing before the reserved display starts, so the winning flash performance can be made to stand out more.

In addition, the execution period of the special display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the special display start effect B is 1.2 seconds, and as shown in Figure 15-28 and Figures 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D), the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the special display start effect A. Therefore, regardless of whether the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern α to display pattern γ, the winning flash effect can start before the specific display start effect ends, so the player can reliably recognize the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect.

Also, as shown in Figures 15-28, 15-29(A), 15-29(B), 15-49(A) and 15-49(B), if it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d are temporarily turned off, allowing the player to recognize the start of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, an example has been given in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d are temporarily turned off when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on a start winning win, but this invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on a start winning win, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d may be changed to emit light at a lower brightness than the previous brightness (for example, if they had been emitting light at brightness C2 until then, they may be emitted at C3, which is a brightness lower than C2). In other words, the "low brightness state" in this invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are emitting light at a low brightness, as well as a state in which they are turned off (not emitting light).

Also, as shown in Figures 15-29 (A) to 15-48 (n) and Figures 15-49 (A) to 15-68 (n), during the variable display, a flash effect when a prize is won can be executed whether or not a preview effect is being executed, and as shown in Figure 15-29 (B), when a flash effect when a prize is won is executed while the variable display is being executed, speakers 8L and 8R output the variable display corresponding sound at volume V2 while outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V1 (V1 > V2), and when a flash effect when a prize is won is executed while the preview effect is being executed, speakers 8L and 8R output the preview effect corresponding sound at volume V2 while outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V1 (V1 > V2). Therefore, even if the variable display corresponding sound or advance notice corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash corresponding sound can be output so that it is easy for the player to hear, so the output of the winning flash corresponding sound makes it easy for the player to recognize that the winning flash corresponding sound is being executed.

In this characteristic section 135SG, as an example of a form in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output in priority over the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display element corresponding sound, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound are output at volume V2. However, this invention is not limited to this, and as an example of a form in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output in priority over the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display element corresponding sound, the winning flash effect corresponding sound may be output at volume V2, while the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound may be output at a volume lower than volume V2 (for example, volume V3).

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, a form in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output in priority over the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display body corresponding sound is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound does not have to be output in priority over the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display body corresponding sound. Specifically, if the advance notice effect starts during the execution of the winning flash effect (while the winning flash effect corresponding sound or the variable display corresponding sound is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be temporarily stopped, and only the variable display corresponding sound and the advance notice effect corresponding sound, or only one of the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound may be output. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game caused by the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound being difficult for the player to hear due to the winning flash effect corresponding sound.

In addition, as shown in Figures 15-28, 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D), when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect in response to a start winning, the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from speakers 8L and 8R, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink and the pending display appearance animation is completed. Therefore, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R allows the player to quickly recognize that a starting winning has occurred and that it has been decided to execute a winning flash effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, an example is given in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking and the pending display animation is completed after the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but this invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the pending display appearance animation may start after the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the execution of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at brightness C1, and during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at brightness C2 (C1>C2). By making at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flash at brightness C1, the player can be made aware of the start of the winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashing at brightness C1 even during the execution of the later winning flash effect can be prevented from interfering with other effects and decreasing interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 15-28, an example is given in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at a brightness C1 and a cycle T2 as a flash effect when a prize is won in the early stage, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at a brightness C2 that is lower than the brightness C1 and a cycle T2 that is longer than the cycle T1 as a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" as a flash effect when a prize is won in the later stage. In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the later winning flash performance of this feature part 135SG includes both a slow flashing mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow flashing speed (long flashing cycle) and a low brightness mode with a low degree of emphasis due to low brightness, but the invention is not limited to this, and the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the later winning flash performance may be only one of the slow flashing mode and the low brightness mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the execution period of the later winning flash effect includes the execution period of the variable display before the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect, and the execution period of the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. Therefore, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 before and after the start of the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect, making it easier for the player to recognize that it is the variable display that is the subject, and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5. During the execution period of the early winning flash performance, effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby making it possible for the player to recognize the start of the winning flash performance, and during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby preventing the image display device 5 from continuing to display effect image 135SG005E from interfering with other displays and decreasing interest in the game.

In particular, in this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in Figures 15-30(D) to 15-31(F) and 15-34(L), the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in a brighter color than the silhouette image 135SG005S, and the display area on the image display device 5 is also larger, so that the display of the effect image 135SG005E can effectively allow the player to recognize the start of the flash effect when a prize is won.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the execution of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V1 as the winning flash effect, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the winning flash effect has started, and by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V2 during the execution of the later winning flash effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the interference with other effects by the winning flash effect corresponding sound.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, while the later winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game caused by the winning flash effect corresponding sound interfering with other effects. However, the invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by the winning flash effect corresponding sound interfering with other effects by not outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound while the later winning flash effect is being executed.

Also, as shown in Figures 15-29(A) to 15-48(n), during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to flash during the variable display pattern determination period before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect begins. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to flash the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the pattern determination period regardless of whether or not a pattern determination command has been received (the determination command reception flag has been set) or whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out. This allows the player's anticipation of being controlled into a jackpot gaming state to be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as a flash effect at the time of early winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated in a manner (brightness C1 and cycle T1) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of early winning, and after the flash effect at the time of early winning ends, as a flash effect at the time of late winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is illuminated in a manner (brightness C2 and cycle T2) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of late winning, while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated in a manner (brightness C3 and cycle T4) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of late winning. Although an example has been given of the lamp 9d being illuminated in a manner corresponding to the background image (brightness C2 and cycle T0), the invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 may clear the process timer for the early winning flash performance when the early winning flash performance ends, thereby preventing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d from illuminating in a manner corresponding to the early winning flash performance during the execution of the late winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-3, a small symbol 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 15-33(J) and the like, during the symbol determination period, the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped. Therefore, even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the symbol determination period, the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed in a combination that indicates a loss, allowing the player to recognize that the symbol determination period is in progress.

Also, as shown in Figure 15-33 (J), while the winning flash performance is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the silhouette image 135SG005S from being overlapped with the small pattern 135SG005M, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display.

In addition, this feature section 135SG can execute a pseudo consecutive performance including a temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during variable display, and when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed in the variable display while the winning flash performance is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed as a winning flash performance superimposed on the special symbol (see FIG. 15-40, etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C when the decorative symbols temporarily stop, so that the special symbol is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, providing the player with an element of surprise and increasing their interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 15-28 and 15-42(a) to 15-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even for the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when a prize is won, making it easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the subject of the flash effect when a prize is won, and increasing the interest of the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when a prize is won.

As shown in FIG. 15-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at brightness C2 and cycle T2 before the start of the reach effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start of the reach effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15-22, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the effect due to static electricity or the like, the later winning flash effect including the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is ended again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern determination command), which is a timing later than the start timing of the reach effect, so that the discomfort felt when the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the start timing of the reach effect can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15-22, if the performance control CPU 120 is unable to determine that it is time to start the reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity or the like, the performance control CPU 120 will end the later winning flash performance based on the reception of a pattern determination command, thereby further reducing the sense of discomfort felt when ending the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-21, if a start winning occurs at the first start port while the reach performance of the Super Reach is being executed, the execution of the winning flash performance is not decided, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the reach performance of the Super Reach can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 15-17, in this feature section 135SG, the reserved display and active display can be displayed in one of display patterns α to γ, which have different jackpot expectation rates, and as shown in FIG. 15-28, when it is decided to display the reserved display and active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ, the start gate lamp 135SG009S will emit light in a color corresponding to display pattern β or display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display based on the start winning, regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash performance or the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc. Therefore, the player can recognize the display mode of the reserved display and active display from the light emission mode (light emission color) of the start gate lamp 135SG009S, which increases the fun of the game.

The features of this invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and the invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the invention.

For example, the flash effect at the time of the later winning in the characteristic portion 135SG has been exemplified as being executed regardless of whether or not it is during the pattern determination period (when the variable display is stopped), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 15-69 to 15-89 as modified example 135SG-1, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc. as the flash effect at the time of the later winning may not be executed during the pattern determination period.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 15-69 and Fig. 15-70 (A), while the variable display is being performed, the image display device 5 performs variable display of decorative symbols, and the speakers 8L, 8R output a sound corresponding to the variable display at a volume of V2. Also, while the variable display is being performed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 15-27 (A) to Fig. 15-27 (D)).

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if the preview performance is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance (preview performance corresponding sound) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2. In addition, there are three first special chart reserved memories as reserved memories (three reserved displays are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

If a winning entry (start winning entry) occurs in the first starting port during such a variable display, and a decision is made to execute a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect based on the starting winning entry, the previous winning flash effect will start, as shown in Figures 15-69 and 15-70 (B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 15-69 and Fig. 15-70 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 15-69, Fig. 15-71 (C) and Fig. 15-71 (D), the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and starts blinking control at cycle T1 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG00X and button lamp 135SG009Y. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

When the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 15-71 (D), 15-72 (E), and 15-72 (F), an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed as the specific display start performance B described above, along with an animation of character A moving to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D where the pending display is displayed (the position where the fourth pending display is displayed in the present modified example 135SG-1) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed at the affected position, in which the pending display that is the subject of the ongoing winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 15-20 (D-1) to 15-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display that has completed its appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like other pending displays, as a special display rotating display performance.

In other words, in this modified example 135SG-1, if a start winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 starts before the pending display based on the start winning is completed. Note that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modified example 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the later winning flash effect (see Figures 15-73 (G) and 15-73 (H)).

When the early winning flash effect ends, the late winning flash effect starts from the end timing. As shown in Figures 15-69, 15-73 (G) and 15-73 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y start to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (flashing in the manner shown in Figures 15-27 (A) to 15-27 (D)), and the image display device 5 starts to display the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at regular intervals.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, at brightness C2 and cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figures 15-74 (I) and 15-74 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where a transparent black image 135SG005B is superimposed over the entire first display region 135SG005F of the image display device 5, excluding the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in Figures 15-74 (J), 15-75 (K) and 15-75 (L), when the variable display ends based on receipt of a pattern confirmation command, the decorative pattern and small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in Figures 15-69, 15-76 (M) and 15-76 (N), during the pattern determination period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R as the latter winning flash effect and the display of silhouette image 135SG005S on image display device 5 are stopped, and only the flashing of main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on image display device 5 continues.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

After that, as shown in Figures 15-75 (K) to 15-82 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the following are repeatedly executed as the later winning flash effect: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and with a cycle of T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5; however, during the pattern determination period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and with a cycle of T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 15-79 (S) to Fig. 15-81 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see Fig. 15-81 (W). In this modified example 135SG-1, decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol notifying of a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the central decorative symbol display area 5C), a later winning flash performance is executed by outputting a winning flash performance corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a cycle of T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

In FIG. 15-81(W), when the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not flashed at brightness C2 and in cycle T2 when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect. However, depending on the timing of the temporary stop, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at brightness C2 and in cycle T2 even when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. In other words, in this modified example 135SG-1, the winning flash effect continues to be executed for the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15-82(Y) and FIG. 15-82(Z), when the variable display that has become a normal reach miss in response to the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash performance at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is also executed during the pattern determination period of the variable display of the normal reach miss. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-82(Y) and FIG. 15-82(Z), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

As shown in Figures 15-81 (W) and 15-81 (X), during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is being executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can recognize that the variable display has not yet ended by visually checking the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in Figures 15-83(a) and 15-83(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance starts, the pending display that corresponds to the variable display displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in Figure 15-84(c) to Figure 15-88(l), the variable display continues to execute the flash effect at the time of the later winning. Also, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figure 15-84(d) and Figure 15-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figure 15-86(g) to Figure 15-87(j)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 15-87 (j)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 15-89(m) and 15-89(n), when the timing for the reach effect to start comes due to the progression of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white), and then the reach effect starts. Note that in this modified example 135SG-1, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

At this whiteout timing, the output of the winning flash effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as the later winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end. On the other hand, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 and the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 continue.

As shown in FIG. 15-69, if a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display and it is decided to execute the hold display preview performance based on the start winning, the start gate lamp 135SG009S will start illuminating in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the hold display preview performance (for example, blue if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern β, and red if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern γ) from the timing of the start winning as a start gate lamp illumination performance.

The illumination of the start gate lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the aforementioned winning flash effect, and regardless of the blinking pattern of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, it continues to emit light in a color that corresponds to the display pattern of the hold display notice effect from the aforementioned start winning until the end of the target variable display of the start gate lamp illumination effect (target variable display of the winning flash effect).

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the initial winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off as the later winning flash effect during the pattern determination period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the variable display is being performed due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F being continuously turned on as the later winning flash effect during the pattern determination period. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the variable display has ended even though it is during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern determination period during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are stopped. However, this invention is not limited to this, and during the pattern determination period during the execution of the later winning flash effect, as long as it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that a variable display is being executed, it is also possible to execute only one or two of these: the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern determination period during the execution period of the later winning flash effect, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound as the later winning flash effect, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc. are not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the pattern determination period during the execution period of the later winning flash effect, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound as the later winning flash effect, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc. are not executed. As an example of a form in which the illumination of the lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, the performance control CPU 120 may, based on receiving a pattern determination command while the later winning flash performance is being executed, clear the process timer for the later winning flash performance, thereby preventing the output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as the later winning flash performance during the pattern determination period.

In this case, the performance control CP 120, upon receiving the first variable display start command, selects the later winning flash performance process table again and resets and starts the later winning flash performance process timer, thereby starting the later winning flash performance (output of winning flash performance corresponding sound, illumination of winning flash lamp 135SG009F, display of silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of the new variable display.

As an example of a form in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not illuminated as a late winning flash effect during the pattern determination period during the execution of the late winning flash effect, the effect control CPU 120 may, based on receiving a pattern determination command while the late winning flash effect is being executed, continue to output to the lamp control board 14 lighting control data that keeps the winning flash lamp 135SG009F off (for example, the RGB value of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is "0:0:0" indicating off), rather than lighting control data according to the process data of the late winning flash effect process timer, until it receives a variable display start command.

In addition, if the later winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern determination period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be executed again from the beginning of each cycle from the start of the new variable display (see Figure 15-69), or the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle from the start of the new variable display.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the variable display ends while the later winning flash performance is being executed, the output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound from speakers 8L, 8R as the later winning flash performance and the display of silhouette image 235SG005S are stopped during the pattern determination period of the variable display, while the flashing of main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d continues in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on image display device 5. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the flashing of main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d may also be stopped during the pattern determination period. In particular, the flashing of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d may be stopped during the pattern determination period by turning off the in lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d during the pattern determination period, or the in lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d may be kept continuously lit in a constant color (for example, a color corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5) during the pattern determination period.

In addition, in the description of FIG. 15-8, in the feature section 135SG, it has been stated that multiple reach effects may be provided as the reach effect of the Super Reach. However, when multiple reach effects are provided as the reach effect of the Super Reach in this manner, the likelihood of a jackpot may be made different between the reach effects of the multiple Super Reach (for example, as the reach effect of the Super Reach, a reach effect of Super Reach α and a reach effect of Super Reach β, which has a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the reach effect of Super Reach α, may be provided).

In particular, in this way, when it is possible to execute multiple Super Reach reach effects with different jackpot expectations, as shown in modified example 135SG-2 in Figures 15-90(A) and 15-90(B), the movable body 32 is made movable between a retracted position (e.g., an upper position of the image display device 5) and an effect position (e.g., a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a variable pattern of Super Reach α (a variable display that executes the reach effect of Super Reach α), the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 during the variable display, excluding the active display area 135SG005A, is temporarily whited out. During the period, the movable body 32 is repeatedly moved between the evacuation position and the evacuation position (for example, an intermediate position between the aforementioned evacuation position and the performance position) to execute a movable body operation suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 should move to the performance position, and if the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance is a variable display in the variable pattern of Super Reach β (a variable display that executes the reach performance of Super Reach β), the aforementioned movable body operation suggestion performance may be executed during the period when the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out, and then a movable body operation performance that moves the movable body 32 from the evacuation position to the performance position may be executed.

By doing this, during the whiteout period, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement of the movable body 32, and when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position (when the movable body movement performance is executed), the player can be notified that the movable body movement performance will execute the reach performance of Super Reach β, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance of Super Reach α, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

For example, if the target of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a Super Reach α variable pattern, as shown in Figures 15-91(A) and 15-91(B), when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, the variable display continues to execute the late winning flash effect. Furthermore, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 15-91(B), 15-92(C), and 15-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variable pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 15-93(E) to 15-94(H)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 15-94 (H)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 15-95(I) to 15-96(L), when the variable display progresses and the timing for the reach effect to start arrives, the first display area 135SG005F, excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5, goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display for a moment, and the first display area 135SG005F goes white). Note that in this modified example 135SG-2, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

As shown in Figure 15-90 (A) and Figure 15-96 (K) to Figure 15-97 (N), during the white-out period, at the start of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body operation suggestion performance, the movable body 32 has repeatedly traveled back and forth between the retracted position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four travels in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism not shown, and the white-out period also ends. During the execution period of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2 instead of the variable display corresponding sound. In addition, the sound corresponding to the movable body operation suggestion effect may be a sound effect (such as a "clatter" sound effect) that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position.

As shown in Figures 15-90 (A), 15-98 (O) and 15-98 (P), from the timing when the movable body operation suggestion effect and whiteout end, the Super Reach α reach effect starts on the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d and winning flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output a reach effect corresponding to the Super Reach α reach effect (such as background music different from the variable display corresponding sound).

When the target of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a Super Reach β variable pattern, as shown in Figures 15-99(A) and 15-99(B), when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, the output of a variable display corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, the variable display continues to execute the late winning flash effect. Furthermore, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 15-99(B), 15-100(C), and 15-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variable pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 15-101(E) to 15-102(H)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 15-102 (H)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 15-103(I) to 15-104(L), when the variable display progresses and the timing for the reach effect to start arrives, the first display area 135SG005F, excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5, goes temporarily white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F goes to white). Note that in this modified example 135SG-2, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

As shown in FIG. 15-90(B) and FIG. 15-104(K) to FIG. 15-105(N), during the whiteout period, at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at brightness C2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, the movable body operation suggestion performance ends when the movable body 32 has repeatedly traveled back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four travels in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism not shown. During the execution period of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output a movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound at volume V2 instead of the variable display corresponding sound. As the movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "clatter") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position may be output.

After the movable body operation suggestion performance ends, as shown in Figure 15-90 (B) and Figure 15-106 (O) to Figure 15-106 (P), the whiteout period ends and the movable body 32 moves from the retreat position to the performance position by a drive mechanism not shown as a movable body operation performance. During the movable body operation performance period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are lit at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body operation performance. Also, although not shown in Figure 15-90 (B), a movable body operation performance corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1 (see Figure 15-106 (P)). As the movable body operation performance corresponding sound in this feature part 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "bang") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body has operated may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-107(Q), the movable body operation presentation ends based on the return of the movable body 32 from the presentation position to the retreat position. As shown in FIG. 15-90(B), FIG. 15-107(Q) and FIG. 15-107(R), from the timing when the movable body operation presentation and the whiteout are finished, the reach presentation of the Super Reach β starts on the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d and the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach presentation, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output a reach presentation corresponding to the reach presentation of the Super Reach β. Note that, as the reach presentation corresponding to the reach presentation of the Super Reach β, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound and the reach presentation corresponding sound corresponding to the reach presentation of the Super Reach α may be output so that the player can recognize that the reach presentation of the Super Reach β is being executed.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of the Super Reach, which is the subject of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 before the start of the Super Reach reach effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of the Super Reach reach effect. In other words, when the reach effect starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light in a manner corresponding to the reach effect (lights on at brightness C2) instead of flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T2, which increases the interest in playing the reach effect.

In particular, as shown in Figures 15-96 (K) to 15-98 (O) and Figures 15-104 (K) to 15-106 (O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout), and during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and then from the start of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to changes in the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and improving the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a Super Reach β variation pattern, the movable body action suggestion effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in response to the execution of the movable body action suggestion effect, and then, in response to the execution of the movable body action effect (movement of the movable body 32 to the performance position), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body action effect. In other words, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at brightness C1 with a period of turning off in response to the execution of the movable body action suggestion effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to changes in these light emission modes, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, a form in which a dialogue preview effect can be executed as a preview effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display has been exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-3, the preview effect may be, in addition to a dialogue preview effect, a step-up effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes in stages, with the expected probability of a jackpot varying depending on the final number of stages of change, or a group preview effect in which a group of multiple characters crosses the image display device 5, etc.

In particular, when the step-up effect can be executed as modified example 135SG-3, as shown in Figures 15-108 (A) and 15-109 (A) to 15-113 (L), when the step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which the winning flash effect is not being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be temporarily lit at brightness C2 at the timing when an image (step-up image) is displayed on the image display device 5 or when the image is gradually changed, thereby enhancing the effect of the step-up effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15-108(B) and FIG. 15-114(A) to FIG. 15-118(F), when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is already blinking at brightness C2 and cycle T2, so the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on when the image (step-up image) is displayed on the image display device 5 or when the image is changed in stages. In other words, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, may not be emitting light in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is started in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash effect, that is, when the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is already flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T2 as a winning flash effect and a step-up effect is started to further light up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect is executed with priority, so it is possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from starting to light up in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect at an inappropriate timing, such as the end timing of the winning flash effect.

In addition, the characteristic portion 135SG has been exemplified as a form in which the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the Super Reach reach performance, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute a movable body operation performance that moves the movable body 32 from a retracted position (e.g., a position above the image display device 5) to a performance position (e.g., a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5) before the start of the Super Reach reach performance, thereby notifying the player that the Super Reach reach performance will be executed.

In this way, when it is possible to execute a movable body movement effect before the reach effect of the Super Reach, as shown in Figures 15-119(A) and 15-119(B) as modified example 135SG-4, when a winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the Super Reach, the expected probability of a jackpot may differ depending on whether the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to either the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect or the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect of the Super Reach.

For example, as shown in Figure 15-119 (C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is a jackpot, at the start of the variable display, it is decided with a probability of 70% that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect from the start timing of the movable body operation effect, and it is decided with a probability of 30% that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect. Then, if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance is a miss, at the start of the variable display, it is decided that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the movable body operation performance, and that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance at a rate of 70% from the start timing of the reach performance.

When it is decided to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation or the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation, the process data corresponding to the decision is selected, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer as the variable display progresses.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-4, depending on the timing when the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends, it may be during the execution of the moving body movement effect or during the execution of the reach effect of the Super Reach, so the player can easily recognize whether the winning flash effect ends during the execution of the moving body movement effect or during the execution of the reach effect of the Super Reach. In particular, as shown in FIG. 15-119(C), the expectation of a big win differs when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the moving body movement effect from the start timing of the moving body movement effect, and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect is changed from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect, so that the player can pay attention to the end timing of the winning flash effect, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, an example is given of a form in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (changing to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or a light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect), but this invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to suggest a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends. This also makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the winning flash effect, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed either at the start of the movable body movement presentation during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash presentation, or at the start of the reach presentation of the super reach. Since the expectation of a jackpot differs depending on whether the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement presentation from the start timing of the moving body movement presentation, or the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation, the player can be drawn to the presentation that is being executed at the time when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, in the variable display of the super reach, a form in which the movable body operation presentation can be executed before the start of the reach presentation of the super reach is exemplified, but this invention is not limited to this, and a movable body operation suggestion presentation that suggests the execution of the movable body operation presentation may be executed before the execution of the movable body operation presentation. In this way, when the movable body operation suggestion presentation can be executed before the execution of the movable body operation presentation, a case is provided in which the light emission mode of the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation suggestion presentation from the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion presentation, and the expectation of a jackpot may be different between the case in which the light emission mode of the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation suggestion presentation from the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion presentation and ... is changed to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the effects being performed when the lighting state of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-4, an example is given of a form in which the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement suggestion presentation from the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion presentation, or whether the light emission mode is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation; however, this invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a form in which the light emission (flashing) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends at the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion presentation and a form in which it ends at the start timing of the reach presentation, so that the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on when the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends. Furthermore, even if multiple timings are provided for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as part of the winning flash effect during one variable display, if the effect control CPU 120 is unable to stop the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F due to static electricity or the like, the later winning flash effect, including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, can be ended again at the end of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is a timing that follows these timings.

By doing this, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as part of the winning flash effect cannot be ended at the start of the movable body operation suggestion effect or the start of the reach effect, the later winning flash effect, including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, can be ended at the end of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, the display patterns for the specific display (pending display and active display) are display pattern α, which has the lowest jackpot expectation and is a white circle, display pattern β, which has a higher jackpot expectation than display pattern α and is a blue circle, and display pattern γ, which has a higher jackpot expectation than display pattern β and is a red circle, but the invention is not limited to this, and display patterns other than display pattern α to display pattern γ may be provided as the display patterns for the specific display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-120 as modified example 135SG-5, in addition to the above-mentioned display patterns α to γ, the display patterns for a specific display may include a display pattern δ that is a white flashing circle that may change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during display as a pending display or active display (expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low), and a display pattern ε that is a specific character-shaped circle that is more likely than display pattern δ to change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during display as a pending display or active display (expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: high).

In other words, for the display patterns of the pending display and active display in variant 135SG-5, among display patterns α to γ, display pattern γ (red display) is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, and display pattern α (white display) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, for the jackpot expectation of display patterns δ and ε when there is no change to display pattern β or display pattern γ, the jackpot expectation may be set lower than that of display pattern α, or may be set higher than that of display pattern α and lower than that of display pattern β.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, display pattern δ and display pattern ε are provided as hold display and active display patterns that may change to display pattern β and display pattern γ, but the invention is not limited to this, and there may also be cases where display pattern α changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a lower rate than display pattern δ and display pattern ε. Furthermore, there may also be cases where the hold display and active display of display pattern β changes to display pattern γ.

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 135SG, an example was given of a form in which the execution or non-execution of the pending display preview performance (a performance in which the pending display or active display is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern β) and the display pattern are determined independently of the decision to execute the flash performance when a prize is won, but the invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the execution or non-execution of the pending display preview performance and the display pattern may be determined in relation to the decision to execute the flash performance when a prize is won.

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-120 for the aforementioned modified example 135SG-5, when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the start winning may be decided as follows: display pattern ε at the highest rate, display pattern δ at a lower rate than display pattern ε, display pattern γ at a lower rate than display pattern δ, display pattern β at a lower rate than display pattern γ, and display pattern α at the lowest rate (display pattern decision rate when deciding to execute a winning flash effect: display pattern ε > display pattern δ > display pattern γ > display pattern β > display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to ε are provided as the display modes for the special displays (pending display and active display), and when the special display is displayed as display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the probability that the winning flash effect will also be executed is higher than when the special display is displayed as display pattern β or display pattern γ. Therefore, by executing the winning flash effect, the player can be drawn to the special display, and the player can also be drawn to whether the special display will change from display pattern δ or display pattern ε to display pattern β or display pattern γ, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a white circle, display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a blue circle, display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a red circle, and display pattern δ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a flashing white circle, so that the player can easily identify the difference between the specific displays by the display color and flashing pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, there is no description of the rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ depending on whether or not a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, but this invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ may differ depending on whether or not a flash effect is executed when a prize is won. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a flash effect is executed when the specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ that flashes white is exemplified as a special mode of the specific display in this invention, but this invention is not limited to this, and the special mode of the specific display in this invention (display pattern δ) may be a color other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal and special modes of the specific display in this invention (for example, purple, black, etc.).

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, a form is exemplified in which a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ, thereby suggesting that the specific display will change to display pattern β or display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute an action presentation that can change a specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on the specific display.

In particular, when an action effect is used, a plurality of action effects having different performance modes that change the specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ (for example, a first action effect that can change the specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in display pattern δ, and a second action effect that has a different performance mode from the first action effect and can change the specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first action effect) may be provided, and when the second action effect is executed, a winning flash effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the first action effect is executed.

By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the action performance will be executed as the first action performance or the second action performance, and by executing the flash performance when a prize is won, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation that the action performance will be executed as the second action performance.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when the special display is displayed in display pattern ε, the probability that the flash effect will be executed when a prize is won is higher than when the special display is displayed in display pattern δ. Therefore, when the special display is displayed in display pattern ε and the flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the player's attention can be drawn to the change in the display pattern of the special display to display pattern β or display pattern γ, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern ε that displays a character is provided as the display pattern of the specific display (pending display and active display), and an example is given in which the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ by executing an action performance on the character as the specific display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as modified example 135SG-6, a character as the specific display can act on another character, and as a result of this action, the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15-121 (A) and Figure 15-121 (B), when the number of first special reserved memories is three and is being variably displayed, a winning entry into the first start port (start winning) occurs, and based on the start winning, the display pattern of the reserved display based on the start winning is determined to display pattern ε as a reserved display preview performance, and an ally character is displayed as the fourth reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to an enemy character (see Figure 15-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display begins; that is, as shown in Figures 15-122(A) and 15-122(B), when the ally character (pending display of display pattern ε) displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the fourth pending display to the display position of the third pending display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Next, each time the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in Figures 15-122(C) and 15-122(D), when the ally character displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third pending display to the display position of the second pending display, and when the ally character displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the second pending display to the display position of the first pending display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the subject of the pending display preview performance begins, the ally character displayed in the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A, and the ally character directly acts on the enemy character within the active display area 135SG005A (a battle performance between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

As shown in Figures 15-123(G) and 15-123(H), if an ally character wins as a result of the battle performance, the ally character changes to an active display of display pattern β or display pattern γ in the active display area 135SG005A. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 15-123(I) and 15-123(J), if an ally character is defeated as a result of the battle performance, the enemy character or ally character changes to an active display of display pattern α in the active display area 135SG005A.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-6, when the reserved display is displayed in display pattern ε, an ally character as the reserved display of the display pattern ε can defeat an enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby changing the active display of the ally character to the active display of display pattern β or display pattern γ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved display is displayed in display pattern ε, the ally character as the reserved display can be changed to the reserved display of display pattern β or display pattern γ by defeating an enemy character when the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

In addition, when the pending display is displayed in display pattern ε, the pending display of display pattern ε may be changed to the pending display (or active display) of display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate when both winning flash effects are executed than when neither winning flash effect is executed. In this way, not only can the player be drawn to the outcome of the battle between the ally character and enemy character as the pending display of display pattern ε, but the player can also be drawn to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed during the battle, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Moreover, in the modified example 135SG-5 and the modified example 135SG-6, display patterns for the pending display and active display are exemplified by adding display pattern δ and display pattern ε to display pattern α to display pattern γ described in characteristic part 135SG, but when the pending display and active display are displayed using display pattern δ or display pattern ε, specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B can be executed in the same manner as when the pending display and active display are displayed using display pattern α to display pattern γ.

More specifically, when the reserved display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ, the specific display start effect A (see FIG. 15-19) is executed as in the case of display pattern α, and when the reserved display or active display is displayed in display pattern ε, the specific display start effect B (see FIG. 15-20) is executed as in the case of display pattern β or display pattern γ, or a specific display start effect in which the period during which the display of the reserved display or active display is completed is longer than that of specific display start effect A and shorter than that of specific display start effect B is executed. In this way, when the reserved display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the player will be able to recognize the winning flash effect sound and the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a timing before the display of the reserved display or active display is completed, similar to the characteristic part 135SG.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, a form was exemplified in which the winning flash effect is a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 together with the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed in stages according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in Figures 15-124(A) and 15-124(B), if a win (start win) occurs in the first start port during variable display when there are three first special chart reserved memories, and a decision is made based on the start win to execute the reserved display notice performance and the winning flash performance, the previous winning flash performance will be started as shown in Figure 15-124(B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in FIG. 15-124(B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-125(C) and FIG. 15-125(D), the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and starts blinking control at cycle T1 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG00X, and button lamp 135SG009Y. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

In addition, when the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 15-125 (D), 15-126 (E), and 15-126 (F), an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed as the specific display start performance B described above, along with an animation of character A moving to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D where the pending display is displayed (the position where the fourth pending display is displayed in the case of this feature part 135SG) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed at the affected position, in which the pending display that is the subject of the ongoing winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 15-20 (D-1) to 15-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display that has completed its appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like other pending displays, as a special display rotating display performance.

When the early winning flash performance ends, the late winning flash performance starts from the end timing. As shown in Figures 15-127 (G) and 15-127 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y start to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (flashing in the manner shown in Figures 15-27 (A) to 15-27 (D)), and the image display device 5 starts to display the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at regular intervals.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, at brightness C2 and cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figures 15-128 (I) and 15-128 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where a transparent black image 135SG005B is superimposed over the entire first display region 135SG005F of the image display device 5, excluding the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 15-128(J), FIG. 15-129(K) and FIG. 15-129(L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash effect at the time of late winning in this modified example 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether or not it is the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-128(J), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

In addition, in this variable display, as shown in Figures 15-129(K) and 15-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 may be displayed larger than in the previous variable display. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than in the previous variable display in this way, the silhouette image is displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 15-130(M) and FIG. 15-130(N), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. The flash effect at the time of the later winning is executed even during the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B overlapping on the image display device 5 even during the pattern determination period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed overlapping with the active display area 135SG005A. In addition, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, either of two silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes can be displayed as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when a prize is won, and when the larger sized silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are displayed overlapping each other. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the larger sized silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed overlapping each other only when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when a prize is won is executed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the variable display that corresponds to the flash effect when a prize is won, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides the active display area 135SG005A, i.e., the active display that corresponds to the flash effect when a prize is won, providing the player with a sense of surprise and increasing their interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when a prize is won, and the overlapping manner between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A may or may not overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, but the invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a case where the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, a case where only a part of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.).

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, there are cases where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, but this invention is not limited to this, and before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance is started, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed so as to overlap the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, and during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash performance displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. This makes it easier for players to recognize the pending and active displays that correspond to the winning flash effects, and because the silhouette image 135SG005S hides not only the pending displays but also the active displays, it adds an extra element of surprise to the player, increasing their interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, the display of silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won is exemplified as an example of a form in which only one of the pending display and the active display is hidden by the display of silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won, but this invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which both the pending display and the active display are hidden by the display of silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect can be displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A or the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is exemplified, but this invention is not limited to this, and when a pseudo consecutive effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash effect as exemplified in the characteristic part 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect can be displayed overlapping the special pattern (see FIG. 15-40, etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C when the decorative pattern temporarily stops. By doing so, the special pattern for notifying the temporary stop is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect, which gives the player an element of surprise and increases his interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, as a re-changeable display effect in this invention, a form in which the special pattern stops in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is exemplified, but this invention is not limited to this, and as a re-changeable display effect, an image different from the special pattern can be displayed on the image display device 5, and a silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won can be displayed overlapping with that image.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, if a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the execution of the winning flash performance based on the start winning is not decided (determined not to be executed), but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-8, if a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display may be specified, and if the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash performance, the execution of the winning flash performance is not decided (determined not to be executed). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific display (hold display or active display) of the target of the winning flash performance from becoming difficult to understand by executing the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-8, an example is given of a form in which the decision as to whether or not to execute the winning flash effect is based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect, but this invention is not limited to this, and the decision as to whether or not to execute the winning flash effect may also be based on the remaining period of the variable display and a period other than the execution period of the previous winning flash effect (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.).

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning occurs in the first start port while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is identified, and if the identified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash effect, the execution of the winning flash effect is not decided; however, this invention is not limited to this, and if the identified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash effect, the winning flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a miss. In this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the Super Reach Reach effect and the winning flash effect due to the overlapping execution of the Super Reach Reach effect and the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance are two light emission modes: blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1 (light emission mode in the early winning flash performance) and blinking at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (light emission mode in the late winning flash performance). On the other hand, the light emission modes of the start port lamp 135SG009S in the start port lamp light emission performance are blue light emission at brightness C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission at brightness C2 corresponding to the display pattern γ. In other words, the characteristic part 135SG exemplifies a form in which the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance is the same as the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance, but the invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance may be different from the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance.

In particular, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, by providing display pattern δ and display pattern ε as display patterns for the pending display and active display, and providing light emission modes corresponding to display pattern δ and display pattern ε as the light emission modes of the start gate lamp 135SG009S in the start gate lamp light emission performance, the number of light emission modes of the start gate lamp 135SG009S in the start gate lamp light emission performance may be made greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance. In this way, the variation in the light emission of the start gate lamp 135SG009S is increased, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is illuminated as a winning flash effect, and the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is illuminated as a starting gate lamp illumination effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-10, the illumination area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is illuminated as a winning flash effect may be set larger than the illumination area where the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is illuminated as a starting gate lamp illumination effect.

As shown in FIG. 15-28, in the case where it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light from the time the starting winning occurs until the start of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, while the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light from the time the starting winning occurs until the end of the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice effect (the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect). Therefore, by applying the modified example 135SG-10, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emitting light in response to the winning flash effect for an excessively long period of time, while maintaining the player's anticipation that the light emission mode of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S will control the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the start gate lamp 135SG009S is lit without blinking as the start gate lamp light-emitting effect, but this invention is not limited to this, and the start gate lamp 135SG009S may be blinked as the start gate lamp light-emitting effect. Furthermore, when the start gate lamp 135SG009S is blinked as the start gate lamp light-emitting effect in this way, the blinking cycle of the start gate lamp 135SG009S may be made different from the blinking cycle (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. By making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking cycle of the start gate lamp 135SG009S different in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the start gate lamp 135SG009S, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a form in which the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, etc. are temporarily turned off when a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, but this invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-11, when a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the image display device 5 may be temporarily lowered to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the flash effect when a prize is won may be started. In this way, when a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced, making it easier for the player to recognize the start of the flash effect when a prize is won.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the image display device 5, that is, the brightness of the image display device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to a low visibility state with lower visibility than the previous state, but this invention is not limited to this. In addition to reducing the brightness (brightness) of the image display device 5, other forms of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may include temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5, operating the movable body 32 in front of the image display device 5, repeatedly operating the image display device 5 itself in the up and down direction, increasing the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 to relatively reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, etc.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in this invention includes a state in which the visibility of the image display device 5 is reduced compared to the immediately preceding state, and includes a state in which the visibility of the image is reduced by a method other than a reduction in the brightness of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 15-28, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in response to the start winning, the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink. However, this invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-12, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in response to the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink, and then the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. In this way, the player can be made to quickly recognize that the start winning has occurred and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided by the blinking (light emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-12, a form has been exemplified in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts flashing, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed, but this invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to have the winning flash effect corresponding sound be output from the speakers 8L and 8R after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts flashing, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display start.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C1 and in a cycle T1, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E, and during the execution period of the late winning flash performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and in a cycle T2, and the image display device 5 displays the silhouette The above example shows a form in which the display of the winning flash effect image 135SG005S is repeatedly executed, but the invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the later winning flash effect, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L, 8R at volume V1, the blinking of winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the display of effect image 135SG005E on image display device 5 may be temporarily executed, just as during the execution period of the earlier winning flash effect. By doing this, even during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, just like in the earlier winning flash effect, making it easier for the player to recognize that the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is about to begin, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution of the later winning flash performance, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance starts, the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E temporarily, just as during the execution of the earlier winning flash performance. However, this invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance starts during the execution of the later winning flash performance, only one or two of the following may be executed: the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this specification is one in which the probability of winning varies depending on the set value (Figs. 1 to 14), one in which a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect can be executed based on the initial winning, and the change in the light emission mode as the winning flash effect varies depending on the lamp (characteristic section 135SG, Figs. 15-1 to 15-68), one in which the winning flash effect is stopped during the period in which the variable display pattern is determined (variant 135SG-1, Figs. 15-69 to 15-89), one in which the reach effect of super reaches with different jackpot expectations can be executed and one in which a movable body action effect can be executed before a reach effect with a high jackpot expectation, and when the movable body action effect is executed, the start of the movable body action effect A variation 2 in which the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation from the timing (Fig. 15-90 to Fig. 15-107), a step-up presentation can be executed during variable display, and when a step-up presentation is executed when the winning flash presentation is not being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the step-up presentation, while when a step-up presentation is executed during the execution of the winning flash presentation, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation (Fig. 15-108 to Fig. 15-118). , a movable body operation presentation can be executed before the start of the reach presentation of the super reach, and the expected probability of a jackpot differs between the case where the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation from the start timing of the winning flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation and the case where the light emission mode changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation (variant example 135SG-4, FIG. 15-119), display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes for the reserved display and active display, and in response to the execution of the winning flash presentation being determined by the start winning, any of the display patterns is selected as the display pattern for the reserved display and active display. Variations include those in which the rate at which the reserved display pattern is determined varies (variant 135SG-5, FIG. 15-120), those in which when display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern for the reserved display, the display pattern ε changes to one of display patterns α to γ in response to the execution of the action presentation (variant 135SG-6, FIG. 15-121 to FIG. 15-123), and those in which the display mode of silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on image display device 5 changes in response to the progress of the winning flash presentation (variant 135SG-7, FIG. 15-124 to FIG. 15-130). However, the pachinko gaming machine of this invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these multiple characteristic parts and variants.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, a pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
A display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
a performance execution means for executing a specific display performance for displaying the specific display and a specific light emission performance for causing the light emission means to emit light, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a special suggestion performance and a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance, a third suggestion performance, and a fourth suggestion performance each having a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion performance;
a development performance execution means capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is notified, and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved as a performance result of the second suggestion performance;
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the third suggestion performance having a higher expectation than the first suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed;
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed;
the effect execution means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect before the display of the specific display is completed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition;
The rate at which the specific light-emitting performance is controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting performance is executed than when the specific light-emitting performance is not executed,
The specific light-emitting performance is a performance in which, during a first period from when the specific light-emitting performance is started to a predetermined timing, the light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and during a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of a variable display that is a target of the specific light-emitting performance, the light-emitting means emits light in a specific manner that is less emphasized than the predetermined manner,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is executed and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is executed,
The specific timing is a timing prior to a timing at which a variable display result in the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is derived.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images